Instrumentation Laboratory ILab600 Chemistry Analyzer Service Manual
The ILab600 Chemistry Analyzer is an automated, random access clinical chemistry analyzer that uses analytical techniques (photometry and potentiometry) for the in vitro quantitation of analytes found in physiological fluids, such as serum, plasma, urine, or cerebrospinal fluid. The ILab600 is available in four models, defined by the optional modules present on the basic unit. The system consists of two major distinct modules – the Analytical and the Operational Modules – which are electronically connected to each other. The Analyzer is where the sampling and analyzing operations take place. The Operational Module, which includes the System PC and a Printer, allows the operator to interface with the system to program all the automated operations performed by the ILab600.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Software Upgrading Procedure
1
ILab600 Service Manual
Revision 0 - July 1998
This pubblication and all materials (including software) concerning the products of ILab600 System are of proprietary nature and are communicated on a strictly confidential basis; they may not be reproduced, recorded, stored in a retrieval system, transmitted or disclosed in any way and by any means whatsoever, wether electronic, mechanical through photocopying or otherwise, without IL's prior written consent. Information contained herein is believed by IL to be accurate: in any event, no responsability, whether express or implied, is assumed hereby by IL for or in connection with the use thereof, or for infringement of any third party right which might arise therefrom, or from any representation or omission contained herein. Information is subject to change and/or updating without notice.
Instrumentation Laboratory S.p.A. - Viale Monza 338 - 20128 Milano
ILab600 Service Manual
Contents
1 Introduction
1.1
General description
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.1.1
1.1.2
Models
Hardware configuration
1.2
Supplies and accessories
1.2.1
Sample cups
1.2.2
Reagent containers
1.3
Instrument functional overview
1.4
Instrument specifications
1.4.1
Sample and reagent
Photometric reaction vassel
Ion Selective Electrodes
Optics
Sample and Reagent barcode readers
Instrument dimensions, weight, power
Interface specifications
System timing
Water consumption specifications
1.5
Safety Certification
1.5.1
CSA Certification
1.5.2
CE Certification
2 Installation
2.1
Preinstallation visit
2.1.1
Working area
2.1.2
2.1.3
Accessibility to the system
Electrical requirements
Instrumentation Laboratory
2.1
2.1
2.2
2.3
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.9
1.6
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.4
1.5
1.5
1.6
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.9
1.10
1.10
1.10
I
Table of contents
II
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
Water supply
Drain line
Biological waste
Requirements for reception area and transporting pathway
2.1.8
2.1.9
DMS interconnection
Telephone line
2.1.10
Preinstallation visit check list
2.2
Installation procedure
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
Unpacking and inspection
System interconnection
Personal Computer installation
System verification prior Power ON
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
System start up
Electrical verifications
Mechanical verifications
Fluidics verifications
2.2.9
Others verifications
2.2.10
Analytical verification
2.2.11
Installation check list
3 Electronics
3.1
System description
3.1.1
Computer/Analyzer Block Diagram
3.1.2
3.1.3
Console SW structure
Master CPU operation protocols
3.1.3.1
Operation at system (power ON) (or reset)
3.1.3.2
Operation protocol at power saving mode
3.4
3.4
3.1.3.3
Operation protocol at emergency stop mode 3.4
3.1.3.4
Operation protocol at standby mode 3.5
3.1
3.1
3.2
3.4
3.1.3.5
Operation protocol of at analysis mode
3.1.3.6
Opertion at maint. mode - water tank repl.
3.5
3.5
3.1.3.7
Operation at maint.mode-incubator water repl.
3.6
3.1.3.8
Operation at maint. mode - probe rinse w. deter.3.7
3.1.3.9
Operation at maint. mode - stirrer rinse w. deter.3.7
2.3
2.4
2.4
2.14
2.15
2.15
2.15
2.16
2.16
2.16
2.17
2.5
2.5
2.6
2.6
2.9
2.9
2.11
2.14
Instrumentation Laboratory
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
3.1.3.10
Operation at maint. mode - rinsing cells 3.8
3.1.3.11
Operation integrity check monitor sens. status 3.8
3.1.4
Slave CPU Control 3.9
3.1.4.1
General description of Slave CPU control
Configuration
3.1.4.2
Operation description at system power ON
3.1.4.3
Operation description at Emergency Stop
3.1.4.4
Operation description at system reset
3.9
3.9
3.10
3.10
3.1.4.5
Operation description at system routine analysis 3.10
3.1.4.6
Operation description of Sample Dispenser
3.1.4.7
Operation description of R1 Dispenser
3.11
3.12
3.1.4.8
Operation description of R2 Dispenser and SPL
Stirrer 3.13
3.1.4.9
Operation description of the Stirrer/Rinse
3.1.4.10
Operation of the Photometer/Cuvette Tray
3.1.4.11
Operation description of Liquid Level Detection function
3.1.4.12
3.1.4.12.1 Location of the Timer Assy
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.6.1
3.1.6.2
Reagent compartment temperature
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.2
Check-out and Adjustments
3.2.1
Operation description of the Timer
Drivers
Temperature control
Incubator Temperature
DC Power distribution
AC Power distribution
Operation of PID
Dip switches default configurations
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.25
3.25
3.25
3.25
3.29
3.30
3.30
3.30
3.2.1.1
Main CPU pcb
3.2.2
Electronic adjustments
3.2.2.1
Adjustment of DC Power pcb
3.31
3.31
3.31
3.2.2.2
Adjustment of Amp pcb
3.2.2.3
Adjustment of Temperature Contr. pcb
3.2.2.4
Adjustment of PID scanner
3.2.2.5
Adjustment of Probe liquid level sensor
3.31
3.32
3.33
3.35
III
Table of contents
IV
4 Mechanics
4.1
General description of the system
4.1.1
General operation
4.2
Mechanics operation cycle description
4.2.1
Controlling systems
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
Operation at power on
Operation in emergency stop
Operation reset
4.2.5
General description on the routine analysis
4.2.5b
Off-line Mode switch setting/LED patterns
4.2.6
Sample dispensing
4.2.6.1
Follow-up move down
4.2.7
Hardware description Sampler assembly
4.2.8
4.2.9
Sampling module check-out and adjustments 4.13
Sample syringe module 4.18
4.3
Reagent (R1&R2) dispensing.
4.3.1
Reagent dispensing cycle description.
4.19
4.19
4.3.2
4.3.3
R1 & R2 check- out and adjustments.
Reagent syringe module
4.4
Photometer/Reaction Disk
4.4.1
Analytical cycle description
4.21
4.28
4.28
4.28
4.4.2
4.4.3
Mechanical cycle
Photometer check-out and adjustments
4.5
Stirrers
4.5.1
Stirring cycle description
4.29
4.30
4.32
4.33
4.5.2
Stirrers check-out and adjustments
4.6
Cuvette wash station
4.6.1
4.6.2
Cuvette washing cycle description
4.33
4.36
4.37
Cuvette wash station check -out and adjustment 4.38
4.1
4.2
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.6
4.6
4.6
4.7
4.10
4.12
4.13
5 Fluidics
5.1
Pure Water supply
5.1.1
Pure water description
5.2
Degassed water supply
5.1
5.1
5.2
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
5.2.1
Degassed Water fluidic description
5.3
Vacuum fluidics
5.3.1
Vacuum fluidic description
5.4
Incubator Bath fluidics
5.4.1
Incubator bath description
5.5
Check-out and adjustments
5.5.1
5.5.2
Adjustment of Pure water pressure
Adjustment of the cuvette washing flow rate
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
Check-out of detergent dilution module
Adjustment of the rinsing pot flow rate
Check-out of the vacuum draining system
Check-out of the draining system
Bio-hazard Waste
5.5
5.6
5.6
5.9
5.10
5.10
5.11
5.11
5.14
5.16
5.18
5.19
5.20
6 Temperature control
6.1
Reagent compartment
6.1.1
Hardware description
6.1.2
6.1.3
Operating cycle
Check out / Adjustments
6.1.3.1
Measuring RGT compartment temperature
6.1.3.1.a Measuring temperature by thermometer.
6.1.3.1.b Adjustment of reagent tray cooling
6.2
Incubator bath
6.2.1
Hardware description
6.2.2
6.2.3
Operating cycle
Check out and adjustments
6.2.3.1
Verification of the water bath temperature
6.2.3.2
Adjustment of water level sensor
7 ISE
7.1
ISE Description
7.1.1
Principle of operation
7.1.2
ISE Specification
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.3
6.5
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.9
7.1
7.4
7.5
Instrumentation Laboratory
V
Table of contents
7.2
ISE Electronics description
7.2.1
ISE Main pcb
7.2.2
7.2.3
Preamplifier description
Liquid sensors control description
7.3
ISE Fluidics
7.4
Mechanical description
7.4.1
7.4.2
Sample probe module
Syringe modules
7.5
ISE Operating cycles description
7.6
Check-out and adjustments
7.6.1
Electronic adjustments
7.6.1.1
Setting and use of DIP switches and LEDs
7.6.1.1.a Default configurations
7.22
7.22
7.22
7.22
7.6.1.1.b Use of local Diagnostic program
7.6.1.2
Check-out and adjustment of liquid level sensor circuitries
7.22
7.6.1.3
Test points of ISE Main pcb
7.6.1.4
7.6.1.6
Test points of Liquid sensor1 pcb
7.6.1.5
Test points of Liquid sensor2 pcb
Test points of Preamplifier pcb
7.30
7.30
7.31
7.31
7.32
7.6.1.7
Checkout and adjustment of bottle level sens.
7.32
7.6.2
Mechanical check-out and alignments
7.6.2.1
Vertical alignment of ISE sample probe
7.33
7.33
7.6.2.2
Electronic home adjustment
7.6.3
Further checkouts
7.6.3.1
Electrode typical offset
7.6.3.2
Cleaning the mixer
7.35
7.35
7.35
7.36
7.5
7.5
7.11
7.12
7.14
7.14
7.14
7.16
7.16
8 Troubleshooting
8.1
Error Dictonary
9 Parts
9.1
Spare Parts list
8.1
9.1
VI
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
10 Maintenance
10.1 Maintenance schedule
10.2 Cleaning solutions
10.3 Maintenance procedures
10.3.1
Clean external probes/stirrers
10.3.2
Clean internal probes/stirrers
10.3.3
Clean rinse wells
10.3.4
Clean the cuvettes
10.3.5
Clean the incubator
10.3.6
Clean the cuvette cover
10.3.7
Clean the incubator level sensor
10.3.8
Clean the fan filters
10.10
10.10
10.11
10.3.9
Clean syringe and syr manifold filters 10.12
10.3.10
Replace syringe sealers/clean plungers 10.14
10.1
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.5
10.7
10.7
10.9
10.3.11
Clean on board cuvette cleaner filters 10.15
10.3.12
Clean and lubricate probes/stirrers shafts 10.15
10.3.13
Clean water inlet filter
10.3.14
Clean ISE syringe plungers
10.15
10.16
10.3.15
Clean ISE sample dilution pot
10.3.17
Clean ISE sample fluidics
10.3.18
Clean the waste tank level sensor
10.3.19
Clean the barcode reader window
10.17
10.18
10.19
10.19
10.3.20
Replace syringe sealers
10.3.21
Replace High Calibrator pot sealer
10.3.22
Replace ISE syringe sealers
10.3.23
Replace ISE probe sealer
10.3.24
Replace ISE tubings
10.3.25
Check quality of deionized water
10.3.26
Check water level inside cuvettes
10.2.27
Check water pressure
10.19
10.21
10.22
10.23
10.24
10.24
10.24
10.24
10.3.28
Check sample probe for damage
10.3.29
Check alignment of probes & stirrers
10.3.30
Set bottom limit of sample probe
10.3.31
Set bottom limit of reagent probe
10.24
10.25
10.25
10.26
10.3.32
Check photometer lamp, replace if needed 10.28
10.3.33
Check electrodes, replace if needed 10.28
Instrumentation Laboratory
VII
Table of contents
10.3.34
Check/replace cuvette drying tip
10.3.35
Check/replace tubings nof cuvette wash 10.29
10.4 Analytical verifications 10.29
11 Interconnection diagrams
Diagram 1: Chemistry Analyzer Fluidic diagram
Diagram 2:
Diagram 3:
Diagram 4:
Diagram 5:
Diagram 6:
Diagram 7:
Diagram 8:
Diagram 9:
Chemistry Analyzer Interconnection
Controller assy Interconnection
CPU Mother pcb
I/O Driver A Interconnection
I/O Driver B Interconnection
DC Power Interconnection
Controller assy Labels
AC Power Interconnection 1
Diagram 10: AC Power Interconnection 2
Diagram 11: DC Interconnection
Diagram 12: Temperature pcb interconnection
Diagram 13: Degasser Interconnection
Diagram 14: AC distribution Interconnection
Diagram 15: Timer Interconnection
Diagram 16: DC Power box Interconnection
Diagram 17: AC Power box Interconnection
Diagram 18: Transformer 400VA
Diagram 19: Transformer 1.5KVA
Diagram 20: SW Regulator assy
VIII
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
1 Introduction
1.1 General description
The ILab600 is an automated, random access clinical chemistry analyzer which uses analytical techniques (photometry and potentiometry) for the in vitro quantitation of analytes found in physiological fluids, such as serum, plasma, urine or cerebrospinal fluid. The results of the measurements are used as medical diagnostic tools.
The following description of the ILab600 system is intended to familiarize the user with its physical layout and configuration.
1.1.1
Models
The ILab600 system is available in four models, defined by the optional modules present on the basic unit.
·
·
·
· ILab600 system
ILab600 with ISE module
ILab600 with Sample Stirrer Module
ILab600 with ISE and Sample Stirrer Module.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
All models have the following common standard features:
* Random access to samples on board
Random access to 64 reagents on board
Primary tube sampling and positive sample ID
Stat sample analysis capability
Barcoded reagents, including reagent ID, lot number and expiration date
Programmable automatic startup
Automatic shutdown and maintenance
Operator interface using a Pentium PC working on a
Windows TM NT environment
1.1
Instrumentation Laboratory
Introduction
*
*
Integral data management, including comprehensive QC package
RS232-C bidirectional interface allowing host query from an LIS
1.2.2
Hardware Configuration
The ILab600 consists of two major distinct modules – the
Analytical and the Operational Modules – which are electronically connected to each other. A main ON/OFF power switch located on the left side of the Analyzer affects both units simultaneously. However, turning this switch OFF does not affect the operation of the reagent compartment cooling unit.
This feature allows the preservation of reagent integrity regardless of the status of the instrument.
· The Analyzer is where the sampling and analyzing operations take place. In order to place specimens and reagents or to perform troubleshooting operations the operator must gain access to the top of this module by lifting a molded plastic cover. This cover is maintained closed at all other times to protect the moving mechanisms from the environment.
· The Operational Module, which includes the System PC and a Printer, allows the operator to interface with the system to program all the automated operations performed by the ILab
600.
The Analyzer Module
The Analyzer front view is made of three distinct areas:
* the top part, where the sampling and analysis mechanisms are located.
* the lower right portion, accessed through a hinged door, houses the fluidic metering and control system providing water to the sample and reagents syringes
* the lower left area also accessed through a hinged door, includes the power supply and electronics.
Main modules of the Analyzer module are the following:
* sample compartment housing the sample tray (for specimens in primary tubes and/or sample cups) and adjacent sample dispenser arm
* cooled reagent compartment, housing the reagent tray and the two adjacent reagent dispenser arms R1 and R2
* photometric analysis module, which includes the reaction cells (cuvettes) tray, the cuvette incubation water bath
(incubator) and the photometer
1.2
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 1.1 - ILab600 front view
ILab600 Service Manual
Instrumentation Laboratory
*
*
*
* cuvette washing unit above the analysis area stirrer for mixing sample and reagents inside the cuvettes optional sample stirrer module to perform sample dilutions in sample cups optional ISE module to perform potentiometric measurements of sodium, potassium and chloride
The schematics of the analyzer rear view (Figure 1.2) show the location of the major electrical and mechanical system components:
* on the right side, the electrical system components include: signal ports for the PC and the water supply unit, the cooling fan for the instrument, the power cord, the main breaker (to turn off the entire system) and the PC power supply for the
PC and the printer
* on the bottom left side are the external water inlet port, the drain port, the biological waste drain port and the signal port for the waste tank level sensor.
The Operational Module
The ILab600 operator controls the operations taking place in the analytical unit from a stand-alone PC system, via a Windows NT based operator interface. A printer allows the user to obtain hard copies of calibration, QC and patient reports.
1.3
Introduction
Figure 1.2 - ILab600 rear view
1.4
1.2 Supplies and Accessories
The following accessories and disposable supplies are required for operating the ILab600 and are exclusively distributed by
Instrumentation Laboratory.
1.2.1
Sample Cups
Specimens may be placed in disposable plastic sample cups, which are held in any position of the sample tray. Calibrators and controls are always placed in these cups.The specifications of this container are:
* Sample cups - Cat.No.182629-03 (8,000 pieces/pack)
– Size: 2.0 mL
– Dead volume: approximately 20 uL
Note: The standard sample cup fits on top of sample tubes in the sample tray, thus allowing the sample to benefit from the positive ID feature, as the barcode label may be affixed on the tube.
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
1.2.2
Reagent Containers
The ILab600 can accommodate both 20 mL and 100 mL reagent containers (Figure1.5). ILab reagents are supplied prepackaged in these containers, already barcoded for automatic identification of reagent ID, lot number and expiration by the instrument. Empty reagent containers can be obtained from IL for use with non-IL applications:
* 20 mL BoatIL™ container, Cat.No. 182629-02 (20 pieces).
To place this reagent container in the inner ring of the reagent tray, use the long plastic adapters supplied with the system. To place this container in the outer ring of the reagent tray, use the short plastic adapters supplied with the system.
* 100 mL BoatIL™ container, Cat.No. 182629-00 (20 pieces).
Requires no adapter.
1.3 Instrument Functional Overview
The basic ILab600 allows the random access analysis of up to
100 tests per sample or group of samples, with a throughput of
400 tests per hour. In the models which include ISE, the throughput is increased by an additional 400 ISE tests per hour.
The samples, calibrators and controls are loaded randomly in a
75-position sample tray, which can hold either primary collection tubes or standard sample cups. The samples are arranged in three concentric circles and do not need adapters. A barcode reader for positive sample identification is capable of accessing the middle and outer circles containing a total of 60 positions.
The reagents, which are prepackaged in 20 mL and 100 mL barcoded reagent containers, are placed in a 64 position reagent tray which fits in a cooled (5 to 15 o C) reagent compartment. A reagent barcode reader identifies the reagent, its lot number and expiration date, all of which are stored in the system memory. The number of on-board tests for each reagent container is determined through reagent probe level sensors.
Following the operator’s request from the stand-alone PC system, or from the LIS downloaded worklist, samples and reagents are aspirated from their respective containers and dispensed into the cuvettes. The 81 Pyrex
®
cuvettes rotate in a
37 o C ± 0.1
o C water incubator, near the photometer. The loading process involves the use of one sample and two reagentdispensing arms driven by positive displacement syringes.
Sample volumes range between 2 and 40 uL per test and reagent volumes vary between 20 and 400 uL per test for up to 4 reagents, as predefined in the test parameters. After the sample and reagent(s) are dispensed into each cuvette, a stirrer mixes
Instrumentation Laboratory
1.5
Introduction
them prior to the photometric measurements. The reaction is monitored at set intervals (33 data points for reactions involving up to 2 reagents, for a total of 9.6 minutes and 74 data points for reactions involving up to 4 reagents, for a total of 21.8 minutes) by a stationary photometric system. The system includes a holographic grating and photodiodes array detector which measures at 12 set wavelengths ranging from 340 to 850 nm.
After each reaction is complete, the cuvette is emptied and washed by a system of washing and drying probes using a combination of detergent and water.
In systems including the ISE module, Na, K and Cl in the sample can be in parallel to the photometric measurements. The sample is aspirated by a dedicated sample probe, diluted 1:21.7 with an on-board diluent, and is directed to flow in front of the three ion selective electrodes for quantitation.
When the measurement is complete, the results can be viewed in the ILab screen and can also be sent to the system printer and/or downloaded to the DMS if the system is so configured.
The software-driven operation described above is carefully synchronized to achieve a high degree of productivity and efficiency. Modifications of the basic described sequence take place when required by the interruption of Stat samples, or by added steps such as automatic sample pre-dilution in the cuvette.
1.4 Instrument Specifications
1.4.1
Sample and Reagent
Mechanism of delivery: Digitally controlled positive displacement syringe.
Reaction volume:
*
*
Minimum total volume: 180 uL
Maximum total volume: 500 uL
Sample volume: Photometric sample volume is under computer software control and is adjustable in 1 uL steps through a range of 2-40 uL. ISE sample volume is fixed at 24 uL.
Sample overfill: 10 uL of sample are aspirated as overfill volume at the first aspiration for each sample.
Reagent volume: Total reagent and diluent dispensing volume are under computer software control and are adjustable in 5 uL steps through a range of 20-400 uL. This applies to Reagents
1,2,3 and 4.
1.6
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Inaccuracy of Sample Measurement: typically 3% or less at 2 uL or more
Imprecision of Sample Measurement: typically 1.5% or less at 2 uL or more
Inaccuracy of Reagent Measurement: typically 2.5% or less at
30uL or more
Imprecision of Reagent Measurement: typically 1.2% or less at
30 uL or more
Reagent volume required for Priming and/or Dispensing:
Reagent required for priming varies from 5 to 20 uL per test depending on the reagent volume which is aspirated. In the case of reagent automatic dilution, no reagent priming volume is aspirated. No reagent is required for flushing.
Reagent Corrosion Precautions: Reagents contact only surfaces made of stainless steel, Teflon
â
and polyethylene tubing, and
Pyrex glass. Specific precautions for each reagent are listed in the corresponding kit’s insert sheet.
Carryover of Analyte and Reagent: Typically 0.002% or less
1.4.2
Photometric Reaction Vessel
81 Pyrex glass cuvettes arranged in a circle; optical pathlength 5 mm.
1.4.3
Ion Selective Electrodes
Chloride: quaternary ammonium salt ion exchange membrane electrode
Potassium: valinomycin liquid membrane electrode
Sodium: crown ether liquid membrane electrode
Reference: silver/silver chloride electrode
1.4.4
Optics
Photometry:
Computer selected wavelengths (340-850 nm) using a concave holographic grating and 12 narrow- wavelength photodiode detectors
Photodiode wavelengths available: 340, 375, 405,450, 510, 546,
570, 600, 660, 700, 750, 850 nm
Wavelength accuracy: ± 3 nm at all wavelengths
Half Band Width: less than 10 nm
Light source: Halogen lamp (20 W)
Instrumentation Laboratory
1.7
Introduction
1.4.5
Sample and Reagent Barcode Readers
The Sample and Reagent barcode readers are Class 2 Laser
Products which conform to IEC 825-1 11.1993.
Light Source Laser beam
Emitted wavelength 670 nm
Maximum output 1.2 mW
Pulse duration 127 micro seconds
*
*
10.6 seconds to 21.8 minutes, with 17.9 seconds between
The Barcode readers recognize the following barcode types:
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Code 39
*
*
Codabar (NW-7)
JAN
The maximum number of digits allowed for a Sample barcode is
16.
The maximum number of digits allowed for a Reagent barcode is 18.
1.4.6
Instrument Dimensions, Weight and Power requirements
Dimensions and Weight:
Width
Depth
980 mm 38.6 in
760 mm 29.9 in
Height 1180 mm 46.5 in
Weight 300 Kg 660 lb
Power Requirements: 230 VAC ± 10%, 50/60 HZ, 2 KVA
Power consumption: 1.6 KVA
Power inlet protection: Magnetic-thermal breaker 10 Amp
1.4.7
Interface Specifications
Interface: Bidirectional DMS communication
Interface parameters are user selectable via the software
Host query function
Interface Standard: RS232-C
1.8
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
DMS: included in the system with functions such as:
* Data Storage for 4800 requests
*
*
*
Patient Reports
QC program with daily and monthly statistics
Monitoring of entire reaction
1.4.8
System Timing
Minimum Lag Time in seconds between start of Reaction and
First possible reading:
10.6 seconds after dispensing first reagent
13.0 seconds after dispensing second reagent
10.6 seconds after dispensing third reagent
13.0 seconds after dispensing fourth reagent
Range of controllable Reaction Interval (incubation time):
10.6 seconds to 21.8 minutes, with 17.9 seconds between consecutive readings.
Range of Total Reaction time during which measurements can be made:
For 2 reagent tests: 10.6 seconds to 9.6 minutes, with 17.9
seconds between consecutive readings.
For 4 reagent tests: 10.6 seconds to 21.8 minutes with 17.9
seconds between consecutive readings.
1.4.9
Water Consumption Specifications
The system utilizes deionized water with a minimum resistivity of
1MOHM/cm (conductivity of 1.0 mS/cm or below) and inlet pressure of 0.5 – 3.5 Kg/cm
2
. Water consumption when the
ILab is active is about 24 L/hour.The water is used as follows:
1. Degassed water for washing cuvettes:
Probes 1, 2, 3 dispense 2 mL- two times in each cuvette
Probe 4 dispenses 1.5 mL- one time
Total volume used: 13.5 mL/cuvette
2. Degassed water for rinsing interior surface of dispenser probe:
Sample: 0.65 mL
Instrumentation Laboratory
1.9
Introduction
Reagent 1 and 2: 1.65 mL each
Total volume used: 3.95 mL/cycle
3. Deionized water for rinsing exterior surface of dispenser probes and stirrers:
Sample: 1.8 mL
Reagent 1 and 2: 3.6 mL each
Stirrer 1 and 2: 8.2 mL each
Total volume used: 25.4 mL/cycle, for a 2-reagent test
1.5 Safety Certification
1.5.1
CSA Certification
The CSA label on the back of the instrument indicates that the
ILab 600 analyzer has been tested by the Canadian Standard
Association.
·
Applicable standards:
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1-92
· UL Std No. 3101-1
ILab system Certificate No. LR 103292-2
1.6.2
CE Certification
The CE label on the back of the instrument indicates that the
ILab 600 analyzer conforms to the Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive 89/336/EEC and 92/31/EEC and to the Low Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC.
·
·
·
Applicable Standards:
EN 55011 - 1991 (Group 1, Class A)
EN 50082/1 - 1992
EN 61010-1 : 1993 and Amendment 2 : 1995
ILab system Certificate No. ME-150005
1.10
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
2 Installation
Complete installation of ILab600 system should be managed as follows:
1. Preinstallation visit:
In order to arrange and set with the customer all the items required for the ILab600 system installation, a preinstallation visit should be carried with a reasonable advance on the foreseen installation date. Main activities of the preinstallation visit are: a. Overview of the laboratory environement b. Define with the customer the actions to be set in the lab in order to fit the system requirements c. Define with the customer the final ILab600 layout in the lab
Details on the preinstallation visit are reported in section 2.1 (and subsections) below.
2. Installation
The installation protocol includes all the procedures describing the system unpacking, interconnection, and verification. Time required for a complete ILab600 system installation is 1/1.5 days.
Installation procedure is reported in section 2.2 (and subsections.
2.1 Preinstallation visit
During the preinstallation visit the laboratory area should be inspected in the light of the following requirements:
2.1.1
Working area
The working area has to meet the following conditions: a) No presence of intensive strong magnetic field, electric field, or high frequency wave.
b) Free from vibrations
2.1
Instrumentation Laboratory
Installation
c) Horizontal floor (slope under 1/200) d) No presence of corrosive or inflammable gas e) Presence of good ventilation and no or little dust f) No direct exposure to sunshine g) Floor rigidity sufficient for supporting instrument weight
(300Kg) h) Roomtemperature: The system can operate, to specification, in an ambient temperature range from 15°C to 30°C with variations within +/-3°C/hour and relative humidity in the range of
45-85% (non condensing). The system generates the following amount of heat: 1.6 KW = 1376 Kcal. If necessary an air conditioning system has to be foreseen.
The temperature in the room should never to drop below 0°C.
2.1.2
Accessibility to the system
The ILab600 system is consising of the analyzer and the personal computer controller.
Figure 2.1
Suggested layout
1 - Pure water tap
2 - Water Deionizer system
3 - Water Deionizer mains power supply connection
4 - Pure (deionized) water tubing, max lenght mt 5
5 - Drain port, max lenght of drain tubing mt 5
6 - ILab600 mains power supply connection (dedicated line), max lenght of mains cable mt 5
7 - ILab computer controller (includes PC with keyboard & mouse, printer, VDU)
8 - Cable interconnection ILab600/PC, max lenght mt 2.5
9 - ILab600 system analyzer
2.2
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Physical dimensions of the system analyzer are the following:
Width: 980mm 38.6inches
Height: 1180mm 46.5inches
Depth: 760mm 29.9inches
Weight: 300Kg 660Lbs
Personal Computer controller should be placed over a desk or stand provided by the customer. PC controller is conneted to the analyzer by a cable (lenght 2.5 mt).
Full accessibility to the entire perimeter of the instrument is required for operator routine, maintenance and service purposes.
Figure 2.1 shows the minimum area recommended for ILab600 systems installation.
2.1.3
Electrical requirements
The instrument has been designed for operating in connection with a standard grounded main supply line of 230 VAC
+/-10%, 50/60 Hz.
The power requirement is 2 KVA
The Mains supply power has to be free from microinterruptions and/or significant overvoltage spikes. If "noisy" mains is suspected, an extensive testing by a Mains Power Recorder has to be performed (indicatively, monitor the mains power over at least one week, 24 hours/day). If required, implementation of an
UPS system should be foreseen.
A dedicated mains supply line has to be provided for the ILab600 supply. Mains supply cables have to be properly rated.
NOTE: testing of the Mains power should be performed in the
Mains supply line of the ILab600.
Presence of an appropriate power switch is required within the distance of 5 meters from the system.
A dedicated grounding with impedence lower than 10 OHM is also required.
If a Deionizer Unit is installed, it is required an additional mains line supply for deionizer unit supply.
2.1.4
Water supply
The system, in order to operate properly, requires to be supplied
Instrumentation Laboratory
2.3
Installation
by pure deionized water respecting the following specifications:
- Conductance has to be 1mS/cm or lower
- Supply water has to be pressurized within the range of 0.5 to
3.5 Kg/cm.
- Pure deionized water shall be obtained from an R.O. deionizer system, or at least shall be distilled water for laboratory use.
- Typical water consuption during analysis cycle is:
24 liters/hour
- The supply port has to be sized for accepting the ILab inlet tubing. Inlet tubing specifications are:
Inner diameter: 9 mm
Outer diamenter: 15.3 mm
- The source of pure water shall be located at no more than 5 mt from the system.
The deionizer unit is an option.
A 24VDC 300mA (max) (TBC) signal is available for driving the deionizer system. If a local deionizer is used, it is recommended, for safety reasons, that the water inlet pipe and the mains power supply of the deionizer be controlled (by a solenoid valve and a relay) together with the ILab600 system.
2.1.5
Drain line
A drain line which collects the waste from the system is to be foreseen, and must be placed near the system drain outlet (within five meter maximum)
As the waste is evacuated per gravity, the waste port should be located at floor level.
The drain line should be capable to evacuate the volume of 50 liters/hour of waste, and the port diameter has to be large enough to be connected with the system drain plumbing, which has an external diameter of 33 mm. it is suggested a diameter of 50mm.
If an R.O. water deionizer system is being used, a water drainage capable to meet the requirements of such a system shall also be foreseen.
2.1.6
Biological waste
ILab600 system is designed to separate the biological waste from the total waste obtained on the rinsing/maintenance cycles.
2.4
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
The system is provided by an external tank for collecting all the biological waste.
Total waste produced during analysis cycle is approximately 24 liters/hour.
Biological waste produced during analysis cycle is approximately
0.75 liter/hour.
The external tank is provided by a level sensor that is triggered as the waste volume is reaching approximately 16/17 liters full. As than full is detected, the system continues to run up to the end of the routine in progress, then instrument status is switched to
"pause"
2.1.7
Requirements for reception area and transporting pathway
A suitable area must be available to receive, stock and uncrate the system upon arrival. Physical dimensions of the crates are:
Box 1
Width:
115cm 45.3inches
Box 2
104cm 41inches
Height:
151cm 59.5inches
Depth:
97cm 38.2inches
89cm
85cm
35inches
33.5inches
Weight:
430Kg 946Lb 100Kg 220Lb
In order to be able to transport the system from the reception area to the installation room, please consider the following steps: a) The various units of the system will be uncrated in the reception area.
b) The minimum acceptable width along the transport path (i.e.
doors, lift, etc) is 800 mm.
c) Should the units be carried along a stairway, they have not to be inclinated more than 10°.
d) Mechanical chocks during the transport may produce severe damage to the units e) It is recommended that the path from reception area to the installation room be preliminary checked during preinstallation visit.
2.1.8
DMS interconnection
The interconnection of the ILab600 to a Data Management
System should be foreseen and defined at this step.
Instrumentation Laboratory
2.5
Installation
2.1.9
Telephone line
The ILab600 system is provided of a remote control option, which may be used for various purpuses (i.e. service troubleshooting, parameters downloading, etc). In order to optimize the use of the remote control option, a dedicated telephone line should be provided. The telephone line should be permanentely connected to the ILab600 system.
2.1.10
Preinstallation visit check list
The check list in the next pages should be photocopied and used as a reminder during the preinstallation visit.
2.6
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
ILab600 system pre-installation check list
Customer
Contact person
FSE signature phone customer approval
1 Working area
1.1
Absence of strong magnetic electric fields or HF waves
1.2
Free from vibrations
1.3
Floor flatness (slope lower than 1/200)
1.4
Absence of corrosive or inflammable gases
1.5
Presence of good ventilation and no or little dust
1.6
No direct exposure to sunshine
1.7
Temperature variation within specifications
1.8
Is an air conditioning systeme required?
O
Y e s O N o O
2.
Electrical power requirements
2.1
A dedicated power supply line rated for 2KVA shall be foreseen
2.2
Laboratory grounding shall have impedence lower that 10 Ohms
2.3
Mains power interconnection shall be located at less than 5mt
O
O
O
2.4
If a deionizer is foreseen, a 2nd power supply line has to be set-up O
2.5
As the dedicated mains line is set-up, mains shall be monitored O
2.6
A UPS unit is foreseen
3.
Water supply requirements
Y e s O N o O
Checked
O
O
O
O
O
O
3.1
Source of P.W. shall be located at < 5 mt from the ILab600 O
3.2
Quality of pure water provided by the lab meets the ILab requirements O
3.3
Pure water shall be provided at a pressure between 0.5 to 3.5 Kg/cm O
3.4
The source of pure water is able to supply at least 24 liter/hour O
3.5
The P.W. port has to be sized according to the diameter of the ILab pure water inlet tubing which has an internal diameter=9mm
4 Drain line requirements
4.1
The drain port shall be located at ground level
4.2
Drain port shall be placed at less than 5 mt from the ILab
4.3
Drain line shall be capble to evacuate more than 50 liters/hour
O
O
O
O
Instrumentation Laboratory
2.7
Installation
4.4
Diameter of drain port shall be sized to be connected with the ILab waste tubing which has an external diameter of 33mm
4.5
If a R.O. deionizer shall be used, drain line shall be foreseen
4.6
Is the use of biological waste option kit required?
5 Reception area and pathway
Yes O No O
O
O
5.1
A suitable area is available to receive, stock and uncrate the ILab
5.2
The transport pathway allows moving the ILab to the lab
6 Others
6.1
Has the interconnection with a DMS system been defined?
6.2
Has a telephone line for remote control been foreseen?
O
O
O
O
Draft the final laboratory layout, indicating, in scale, the location of the following items:
ILab system, ILab power supply port, Pure water port, Drain port/s, R.O. deionizer (if any), R.O. deionizer water/mains supply ports (indicationg also if deionizer control by the
ILab will be realized), UPS (if any), air conditioning system (if any).
warning: leave one photocopy of the final installation check-list (including laboratory layout) to the customer for reference.
2.8
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
2.2 Installation procedure
2.2.1
Unpacking and inspection
Carefully inspect the creates for damage. If any damage is noted, notify the carrier immediately.
The crate is equipped by a tilt detector. Verify the tilt detector status.
If no sign of damage is seen, then carefully uncrate the units and unpack the accessories. For uncrating the system, first remove the top cover, then the four side covers.
As the top and side covers of the box have been removed, remove the two bottom stocks from the bottom of the ILab, assembly the two slopes, set the slopes into the hinges and carefully drive the system from the wooden base to the floor pushing the system on the four bolts. (refer to figure 2.3).
Figure 2.3 - ILab uncrating
Instrumentation Laboratory
2.9
Installation
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
5
6
7
1)
2)
3)
8
1)
2)
3)
# IL P/N
1
2
3
1)
2)
3)
4)
4
Remove the four bolts from the ILab chassy.
Verify that all the parts listed in the packing lists are included in the packings. Packing list documents are included in the accessories packings inside the crate.
A copy of packing list is reported here below. Be aware that the content of the packing list may be modified without notify, therefore, on installation, refer to the packing list included in the instrument crate.
Shmdz P/N
241-01000
241-01044
N.A.
241-01124
241-01095
241-01109
241-01174
241-01550
241-01340
241-01240-01
241-01015
038-03005
241-94041
206-40481-02
204-62691-01
204-63691-02
241-95010
241-92594-01
086-16101
241-01327
241-01326
241-01012
241-01013
241-01158
241-01073
Description
Analyzing module
Terminal assy
Cover set
Front cover
Side cover, R
Side cover, L
ISE cover
Reaction tray
Reagent tray
Sample tray (N°1)
ILab600 standard accessories
Tool box B85
Standard tool
Set of wires
Syringe sealer sample
Syringe sealer reagent
Lamp PG64258/ME-MLP
Bottle, 20ml (10 pcs)
Pincette AA
Reagent adapter inner 20ml
Reagent adapter outer 20ml
Installing parts
Tube assy IN
Drain port assy
Panel (bracket for drain port)
Quantity
1
1
1 set
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 0
3 2
1
1
1 set
1
1 set
1
1
1
1 set
1
2.10
Instrumentation Laboratory
# IL P/N
4)
5)
6)
9
1)
2)
Shmdz P/N
241-90005-04
037-61028
241-96181-01
241-01003-01
241-02200-01
241-02204-01
ISE ACCESSORIES
1 240-04016
2 204-63691-01
3
4
5
206-45878-01
206-45878-02
206-45727-02
6
7
8
638-43755
240-07061
241-90003
ILab600 Service Manual
Description
Tube 5000 (for drain, 5mt)
Tube clamp HB-1-36
Cable for personal computer
Waste tank set
Waste tank level sensor
Waste tank
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
High cal pot packing
Syringe sealer sample 1.6
ISE Syringe sealer 7.28
ISE Syringe sealer 5.05
ISE probe sealer
Electrode sealer
Tube clamp
Dummy electrode
1
2
3
1 2
1
1
1
1
2.2.2
System interconnection
Open all the accessory crates and assembly the system (refer to fig 2.4 and 2.5) in the following sequence: a. Check all PCBs, connectors and of the ILab600 system are securely fastened.
b. Check that the internal tubings and the tubings metal ties are securely fastened.
c. Unpack and install reaction, sample and reagent trays.
d. Unpack the hinges and the magnetic latches of the front doors
(they are pached and fixed by adehesive tape in the front of the system, in the area below the syringe modules).
e. Install the two front doors.
f. install the two side covers.
g. Unpack and install the personal computer, the printer and the
CRT. Connect to the ILab system by using the Terminal assy and the signal cable.
h. Install the Drain port assy to the rear of the ILab600. Connect the drain plumbing between the ILab drain port and the drain line
Instrumentation Laboratory
2.11
Installation
of the laboratory.
i. Install the Tube assy inlet at the Pure water inlet port at the rear of the ILab system. Connect the other end of the tube assy inlet to the Degassed water source.
l. Install the ISE electrodes.
Figure 2.4 - accessory unpacking and installation
2.12
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Figure 2.5 - Rear system interconnections
P/N ____
00000000
m. Install the ISE reagents & solutions: place Slope solution
(100ml bottle) in its housing on the top panel of the analyzer, nearby the ISE sample probe. Place Reference Solution (1l bottle). Place Calibrator (1l bottle) and Diluent (2l bottle) in their housing behind the analyzer right front door.
n. Prepare the detergent solutions indicated in the table below:
Description__
New Acid S
New Alkali S
New Alkali
New Acid
New Alkali
New Acid
New Clean
Quantity/Concentration_
1 liter bottle, concentrate
1 liter bottle, concentrate
20 mL bottle, 2% dilution
20 mL bottle, 2% dilution
20 mL bottle, 2% dilution
20 mL bottle, 2% dilution
20 mL bottle, concentrate
Location__
Detergent 1
Detergent 2
R 1 D 1
R 1 D 2
R 2 D 1
R 2 D 2
R 2 D 3
Place the detergent solutions in the specific locations as indicated in figure 2.6.
Instrumentation Laboratory
2.13
Installation
Figure 2.6 - Detergent solutions
2.14
2.2.3
Personal Computer installation
a. Installation of Windows NT (if needed) b. Configuration of the accessories (printer, modem, auto-login) c. Installation of ILab600 software program d. Connection of the PC to the ILab600 (mains power to terminal assy and signal cable)
2.2.4
System verification prior Power ON
a. Check groundings: measure resistance between the instrument chassy and the ground wiring of the mains supply cable. The value measured should be lower than 0.2 OHM.
b. Check water pressure: the pressure at the ILab Pure Water Inlet should be in the range of 0.5 to 3.5 Kg/cm2.
c. Check that the Inlet Voltage selectors (2 selectors, located in the box located at the rear of the Solid State Relay pcb, ref. to
Interconnection Diagram 9) are set to 230 VAC. Check that the
Voltage Selector of the Terminal assy (located at the bottom rear of the system) is set according to Printer, VDU and PC supply voltage (typically 230VAC).
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
2.2.5
System start up
a. Connect the mains supply cable to the mains line supply b. Switch ON the mains breaker located at the rear of the system c. Switch ON the power switch located at the right side of the analyzer. The system performs automatically the software program downloading and the mechanical inizialization.
2.2.6
Electrical verifications
Board
Temperature contr. pcb
a. Measure the DC voltage of the following PCBs:
Location
CN2/CN3 Pin 1-2
Nominal VDC
+5VDC
Temperature contr. pcb
Temperature contr. pcb
Driver Mother pcb
DC Power pcb
CN2/CN3
CN2/CN3
CN16/CN17
Pin 3-4
Pin 4-5
Pin 1-4
CN5/CN6/CN7 Pin 1-4
+15VDC
-15VDC
+24VDC
+12VDC
+4.9
Range
÷
+5.2
+14.5
÷
+15.5
-14.5
+23.0
÷
-15.5
÷
+25.0
+12.0
÷
+14.0
Item
Lamp voltage
b. Measure the lamp voltage. Measurement should be done with system in Ready status on the lamp connector. Specifications of measurements are:
Location
Lamp connector
Nominal VDC
+11.5VDC
+11.4
Range
÷
+11.6
c. Check the sensitivity of the level sensor of the sample probe d. Check the sensitivity of the level sensor of the reagent (R1 & R2 probes e. Check the following voltages of the ISE Main pcb:
Location Nominal VDC Range
TP 12-13
TP 14-15
5.00VDC
24.0VDC
4.8 to 5.2VDC
23.0 to 25.0VDC
TP 19-15
TP 16-17
TP 18-17
12VDC
15.0VDC
-15.0VDC
11.1 to 15.6VDC
14.25 to 15.75VDC
-14.25 to -15.75VDC
2.2.7
Mechanical verifications
a. Check the mechanical alignment of the following modules:
- Cuvette tray module
- Photometer module
Instrumentation Laboratory
2.15
Installation
- Sample probe (chemistry) module
- Sample probe (ISE) module
- Reagent (R1 & R1) probe modules
- Reagent tray
- Stirrer module
- Washing station module
2.2.8
Fluidics verifications
a. Check carefully for leakage at the rear and inside the analyzer b. Check for leakages at the sample, reagent and ISE syringes c. Check for leakage at the vacuum system d. Check the pure water pressure - value has to be 90KPa - adjust if required e. Check the vacuum level - nominal value is f. Check the drain line for proper draining g. Check visually the water circulation into the incubator water bath h. Check the filling level of the cuvettes during cuvette washing
2.2.9
Others verifications
a. Check the level revision of the instrument software program on
EPROM. Upgrade to the last revision level b. Check the temperature of the Reagent compartment c. Check the operation of sample bar ode reading d. Check the operation of the reagent bar code reader e. Check the remote control system
2.2.10
Analytical verification
Analytical verifications should be carried as follows:
a. Measure Water Blnks
perform at least two water blank measurements, then check the mean value. At any wavelenght Mean should be:
MEAN: 0 to 250mAbs
Note: SD performance is not meaningful
2.16
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
b. Run reagent blank+calibration
Perform a reagent blank and calibration of the following tests:
Cholesterol, Albumine, Calcium, Total Protein, Iron, AST and
GGT.
Check the results according to the specifications indicated in the checklist reported in page 19
c. Run ISE internal calibration
Repeat ISE internal calibrations until the calibration does not show any flag. At this step perform:
1. five ripetitions of internal calibration. CF should be always within the following ranges:
Na: 0.95 to 1.20
K: 0.95 to 1.20
Cl: 1.00 to 1.20
2. three more repetitions of internal calibration. Calibrator concentration should always be within the following ranges:
Na: 198 to 202 mmol/L
K: 7.9 to 8.1 mmol/L
Cl: 158 to 162 mmol/L
d. Run precision test (chemistry+ISE)
Fill 20 cups of Serum Control material, and perform a precision test of the following tests:
Cholesterol, Albumine, Calcium, Total Protein, Iron, AST, GGT and ISE (Na, K, Cl).
Check the results according to the specifications indicated in the checklist reported in page 19
2.2.11
Installation check list
The check list in the next pages should be photocopied and used as a reminder during the installation visit.
Instrumentation Laboratory
2.17
Installation
ILab600 system installation check list
Date
Customer phone
Action
Environmental check-outs
Room temperature
Electrical requirements
Water supply/drain rquirements
DMS interconnection
Instrumet model & S/N
Contact person
FSE signature
Checked
O
O
O
O
Instrumental check-outs
Check instrument crate
Check packing list
Check that PCBs, connectors and tubing are securely fastened
Perform system interconnection
Check the integrity of all cuvettes of reaction tray
O
O
O
O
O
Install ISE reagent & detergent solutions
Check grounding
Check ILab voltage settings O
Install the personal computer - Install Windows NT & ILab600 sostware program O
SW program rev..............
Perform the following DC voltage measurements:
Item Location Measured VDC
Temperature contr. pcb CN2/CN3 Pin 1-2
Temperature contr. pcb
Temperature contr. pcb
Driver Mother pcb
CN2/CN3 Pin 3-4
CN2/CN3 Pin 4-5
CN16/CN17Pin 1-4
O
O
Range
+4.9 to+5.2
+14.5 to+15.5
-14.5 to-15.5
+23.0 to+25.0
DC Power pcb
Lamp voltage
ISE Main pcb
ISE Main pcb
ISE Main pcb
ISE Main pcb
ISE Main pcb
CN5/CN6/CN7 Pin 1-4
Lamp connector
TP 12-13
TP 14-15
TP 19-15
TP 16-17
TP 18-17
+12 to+14V
+11.4¸+11.6
4.8 to 5.2VDC
23.0 to 25.0V
11.1 to 15.6V
14.25 to 15.75V
-14.25 to -15.75
2.18
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Perform the following mechanical verifications:
a. Check the mechanical alignment of the following modules:
- Reaction disk module
- Photometer module
O
O
Action
- Sample probe (chemistry) module
- Sample probe (ISE) module
- Reagent (R1 & R1) probe modules
- Reagent tray
- Stirrer module
- Washing station module
Perform the following fluidics checks:
a. Check carefully for leakage at the rear and inside the analyzer b. Check for leakages at the sample, reagent and ISE syringes c. Check for leakage at the vacuum system O d. Check the pure water pressure - value has to be 90KPa - adjust if required O
O
O
Checked
O
O
O
O
O
O e. Check the vacuum level - nominal value is -0.05 to -0.08 MP f. Check the drain line for proper draining g. Check for proper drain the pure water tank h. Check for proper drain the incubator bath i. Check visually the water circulation into the incubator water bath l. Check the filling level of the cuvettes during cuvette washing
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O m. Check the adjustment of sample, R1 and R2 probes liquid sensors n. Set the lower limit of sample, R1, R2 and ISE probes
Other verifications
a. Check the level revision of the instrument software program on EPROM.
Upgrade to the last revision level b. Check the temperature of the Reagent compartment (Nominal 3 to 15°C) c. Check the operation of sample bar code reading d. Check the operation of the reagent bar code reader e. Check the remote control system
O
O
O
O
O
Instrumentation Laboratory
2.19
Installation
Analytical verifications:
a. Measure Water Blnks:
MEAN value: __________________mAbs (-250 to -525mAbs)
b. Run reagent blank+calibration
T e s t RGT blk mAbs (spec) CalmAbs (spec) Cal K1 (spec)
Cholesterol
Albumine
Calcium
__________
__________
__________
(N.A.)
(N.A.)
(N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
_______ (N.A.)
_______ (N.A.)
_______ (N.A.)
Total Protein __________ (N.A.)
Iron __________ (N.A.)
A S T
GGT
__________
__________
(N.A.)
(N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
_______ (N.A.)
_______ (N.A.)
_______ (N.A.)
_______ (N.A.)
c. Run ISE internal calibration
1. five ripetitions of internal calibration. CF should be always within the following ranges:
Na: 0.95 to 1.20
K: 0.95 to 1.20
1 ______ 2______ 3______ 4______ 5______
1 ______ 2______ 3______ 4______ 5______
Cl: 1.00 to 1.20
1 ______ 2______ 3______ 4______ 5______
2. three more repetitions of internal calibration. Calibrator concentration should always be within the following ranges:
Na: 198 to 202 mmol/L 1 ______ 2______ 3______
K: 7.9 to 8.1 mmol/L
Cl: 158 to 162 mmol/L
1 ______ 2______ 3______
1 ______ 2______ 3______
d. Run precision test (chemistry+ISE)
T e s t Concentration (spec)
Cholesterol
Albumine
__________ (N.A.)
__________ (N.A.)
Calcium __________ (N.A.)
Total Protein __________ (N.A.)
Iron __________ (N.A.)
A S T
GGT
N a
K
Cl
__________ (N.A.)
__________ (N.A.)
__________ (N.A.)
__________ (N.A.)
__________ (N.A.)
C.V
(spec)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
________ (N.A.)
2.20
Instrumentation Laboratory
Fig 3.1
3 Electronics
3.1 System description
3.1.1
Computer/Analyzer Block Diagram
ILab600 Service Manual
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.1
Electronics
3.1.2
Console SW structure
Figures 2, 3 and 4 below show block diagram of the ILab600 console SW structure
fig 3.2
fig 3.3
3.2
Instrumentation Laboratory
fig 3.4
ILab600 Service Manual
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.3
Electronics
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
3.1.3
Master CPU operation protocols
3.1.3.1
Operation protocol at system (power ON) (or reset)
INITIAL OPERATION (TIME 0)
1-Pure Water valve (SV71) is turned ON
*As Float Switch in PW Tank detects filled level low, PW Pump is turned ON
2-Vacuum Pump is turned OFF
3-Degasser Vacuum Pump is turned OFF
4-Degasser Relief Valve (SV61) is turned ON for 15 sec.
2 SECONDS LATER
1-Degasser Vacuum Pump is turned ON
35 SECONDS LATER
1-Vacuum Pump is turned ON
40 SECONDS LATER *(AS PW PUMP IS TURNED ON)
1-Photometer lamp is turned ON
1 second after the Photometer lamp has been turned ON, the
Light Source check is triggered
2-Incubator Water Feed valve (SV34) is opened (turned ON)
AS INCUBATOR BATH LEVEL SENSOR IS ON FOR 1 SECOND
1-Incubator Water Feed valve (SV34) is turned OFF
2-Incubarot Circulating pump is turned ON
3-Incubator Temperature regulation is turned ON
STEP 1
3.1.3.2
Operation protocol at power saving mode (Sleep mode)
SWITCH TO POWER SAVING MODE (SLEEP mode)
1-Vacuum Pump is turned
2-Degasser Vacuum pump is turned OFF
3-Photometer lamp is turned OFF
4-24VCD-A is turned OFF (vedere come)
5-24VDC-B is turned OFF (vedere come)
STEP 1
3.1.3.3
Operation protocol at emergency stop mode
EMERGENCY SWITCHBUTTON IS PRESSED
1-Incubator Drain valve (SV51) is turned OFF
2-Incubator Water Feed valve (SV34) is turned OFF
3-PW Tank Drain valve (SV72) is turned OFF
4-PW Feed valve is turned OFF
3.4
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
S T E P 1
3.1.3.4
Operation protocol at standby mode
SWITCH TO STAND-BY MODE
1-Incubator bath is controlled as follows:
-as Incubator Bath level sensor goes OFF (detecting low water
level) the Incubator Water Feed valve (SV 34) is turned ON
-as Incubator Bath level sensor stays ON > 1 second the
Incubator Water Feed valve (SV 34) is turned OFF
-as the cumulative opening time of Incubator Feed valve (SV34)
reaches 40 seconds Detergent is automaticaly supplied into the
incubator
-if the Incubator Bath level sensor is detecting water level low
over 90 seconds while the Incubator Water Feed valve has
been turned ON: a-Incubator Water Feed valve is turned OFF b-Incubator circulating pump is turned OFF c-Incubator temperature regulation is turned OFF d-Error condition is reported
2-Degasser Relief valve (SV61) is turned ON for 15 seconds every 15
minutes
3.1.3.5
Operation protocol of at analysis mode
DURING ANALYSIS THE INCUBATOR WATER LEVEL AND THE
DEGASSER ARE CONTROLLED AS FOLLOWS:
1-the Incubator water feed valve is turned ON for 0.1 sec every 90 sec.
2-the Degasser Relief valve is turned ON for 15 seconds every 15
minutes
STEP 1
STEP 2
3.1.3.6
Opertion protocol at maintenance mode - water tank replacement
WATER IN THE PURE WATER TANK IS DRAINED
1-PW Pump is turned ON
2-PW Feed valve (SV34) is turned OFF
3-PW Tank drain valve (SV 72) is turned ON
INTEGRITY CHECK OF THE OPERATION IS PERFORMED:
Check 1: water level decrease in the PW tank is monitored as follows:
Float Switch of PW Tank should detect low level of water (low level=Float Switch OFF) within 120 seconds. If not:
-error condition is reported and operation is interrupted
-Drain valve (SV72) is turned OFF
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.5
Electronics
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
-Pure Water Feed valve (SV71) is turned ON
Check 2: Pure Water tank empty is checked as follows:
Pure water pressure switch should detect pressure low (Switch OFF) within 120 seconds after the Float Switch level OFF has been detected. If not:
- error condition is reported and the operation is interrupted
- Pure Water pump is turned OFF
AS DRAINING OF WATER FROM PW TANK HAS BEEN
COMPLETED (PRESSURE SWITCH TURNED TO OFF) RINSE OF
PIPING IS PERFORMED BY FEEDING AND DRAINING A SMALL
VOLUME OF WATER AS FOLLOWS:
1-Pure Water pump is turned OFF
2-Pure Water Drain valve (SV72) is turned OFF
3-Pure Water Feed valve (SV71) is turned ON for 10 seconds
WATER IS DRAINED REPEATING OPERATION DESCRIBED IN
STEPS 1 AND 2 ABOVE
PURE WATER TANK IS REFILLED AS FOLLOWS:
1-Pure Water pump is turned OFF
Pure Water Feed valve (VS71) is turned ON
INTEGRITY CHECK OF THE OPERATION IS PERFORMED
MONITORING THE FLOAT SWITCH OF PW TANK: the float switch should turn to ON within 10 minutes from starting of step 5. If not:
1-Pure Water Feed valve (SV71) is turned OFF
2-error condition is reported and the operation is interrupted
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
3.1.3.7
Operation protocol at maintenance mode-incubator water replacement
INCUBATOR WATER DRAINING STARTS
1-Incubator Water Feed valve (SV34) is turned OFF
2-Incubator temperature regulation is turned OFF
3-Incubator Circulating pump is turned OFF
4-Incubator Drain valve (SV51) is turned ON
INCUBATOR WATER IS DRAINED: water is drained for 30 seconds
WATER DRAINING IS STOPPED, WATER REFILL IS STARTED
1-Incubator Drain valve (SV51) is turned OFF
2-Incubator Water Feed (SV34) valve is turned ON
3.6
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
DETERGENT IS DISPENSED IN THE INCUBATOR
1-Detergent is dispensed into the incubator by R2 dispenser. If no
detergent is present error condition is reported and the operation is
interrupted
INTEGRITY CHECK OF OPERATION REFILL ES PERFORMED:
Check: Incubator Bath level sensor should detect incubator full level
(sensor turned to ON) within 90 seconds from starting step 3. If not:
1-Incubator Water Feed valve (SV34) is turned OFF
2-error condition is reported and the operation is interrupted
INCUBATOR REFILL IS COMPLETED
As the Incubator Bath level sensor has detected incubator level full
(ref step 5):
1-Incubator Water Feed valve (SV34) is turned ON
2-Incubator circulating pump is turned ON
3-Incubator temperature regulation is turned ON
3.1.3.8
Operation protocol at maintenance mode - probe rinse with detergent
DESCRIPTION:THE DETERGENT IS ASPIRATED FROM THE SPECIFIED
POSITION, THAN IT IS DISCARDED INTO THE RINSING POT
3.1.3.9
Operation protocol at maintenance mode - stirrer rinse with detergent
DESCRIPTION:THE SPECIFIED DETERGENT IS DISPENSED INTO THE
CUVETTE BY THE R2 DISPENSER AND THE STIRRING PADDLE
IS REINSED INSIDE THE CUVETTE as follows:
1-if the cuvette to be used is already rinsed, the water is drained. If the
cuvette has not been rinsed yet, it is first rinsed with detergent
2-the specified detergent is dispensed into the cuvette to be used by
R2 dispenser
3-the stirring paddle is moved down into the cuvette in which the
detergente has been dispensed, then rotated
4-the stirring paddle is moved into the rinsing pot and rinsed by pure
water
5-above steps 2 and 3 are repeated as many times as required
5-the cuvette used is rinsed with detergent
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.7
Electronics
3.1.3.10
Operation protocol at maintenance mode - rinsing cells
1-Pure water+the specified detergent are loaded into probe of the
wasing station
2-the cuvette under the washing station is rinsed
3-the cuvette tray is rotated by one cuvette
4-the above steps 2 and 3 are repeated untill all cuvettes have been
rinsed by all the 6 probes of the washing station
5-Pure water is loaded into the probe of the washing station
6-cuvette is rinsed by pure water 5 times
7-cuvette is drained
3.1.3.11
Operation integrity check monitoring sensors status
1-as all the cuvettes have been rinsed, water is drained. If any cuvette
has not been rinsed yet, cuvette washing with detergent is performed
2-pure water is loaded into the rinsing probe
3-pure water is loaded into the cuvette using rinsing probes #3,4,5
4-Cuvette tray is rotated in order to place cuvette # 1 at the beginning
of photometry acquisition position
5-data acquisition is performed for 81 cuvettes
3.1.3.11
Operation integrity check monitoring sensors status
Error condition: -An error condition is triggered whenever the sensor status is turned to
OFF continuously for the timing indicated in table below:
Sensor
Pure water level low signal
Pure water pressure switch
Degasser chamber pressure switch
Vacuum tank level switch
Vacuum tank pressure switch
Drain tank full
Incubator water level detection
Other error condition signals
Timing
5 seconds
5 seconds
5 seconds
5 seconds
18 seconds
5 seconds
1 second
1.5 seconds
Normal condition:-The normal condition status is triggered whenever the status of any
sensor is turned ON continuosly for 1 second.
3.8
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
3.1.4
Slave CPU Control
3.1.4.1
General description of Slave CPU control
Configuration
The ILab600 system is equipped by two Slave CPUs CPU SLA-
VE A and cpu slave b) located into the Controller Cardcage.
Each slave CPU is a 68 Series 8-bit one-chip microcomputer; the control program is stored in a CMOS 32kB EPROM.
Job management
The Main CPU manages the job of the entire Analyzing unit.
The Slave CPUs manage the job of each module (i.e. motor drive, etc). The system is divided into the modules indicated below, and each module is controlled by a dedicated CPU: (the abbreviation of the CPU name is indicated on the PCB.
Sample dispenser/sample tray: SDC (sample dispenser control)
R1 dispenser/reagent disk: R1DC (R1 dispenser control)
R2 dispenser/sample cup stirrer: R2DC (R2 dispenser control)
Stirrer/rinsing module:
Photometer/reaction disk:
SRC (stirrer rinse control)
PHC (photometer control)
Slave CPU execution format
The analysis operation program of the Slave CPU is stored in the
ROM of the Slave CPU and the ROM card of the Main CPU.
Whenever the power is turned ON the two ROMs programs are compared, and the newer version program is downloaded into the
RAM of the Slave CPU. The program downloaded in the RAM of the Slave CPU will be executed.
Communication between Main CPU and Slave CPUs
On analysis operation the Main CPU manages the entire
Analyzing module sending commands to each Slave CPU. The
Slave CPU performs the specified operations, and returns the knowledges on status information if required. While a command execution is in progress, no other command except Emergency
Stop is accepted.
Communication between Slave CPUs A and B
Specific checks are run between Slave CPUs in order to prevent any conflict between mechanical operations.
STEP 1
3.1.4.2
Operation description at system power ON
As power is turned ON, all the Slave CPUs start the common downloading program. The program is started up in the ROM of the
Slave CPU, and enables the Slave CPU to communicate with the
Main CPU.
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.9
Electronics
STEP 2
Note: at this step mechanical module are still not operating yet
The system compares the level revision of the program resident in the ROM of the Slave CPU versus the level revision of the program resident in the Main CPU, then, if the Main CPU ROM has an higher revision level, program is downloaded into the RAM memory of the
Slave CPUs. If the Main CPU ROM and the Slave CPU ROM have the same revision level, program is downloaded from the Slave CPU
ROM into the RAM. Downloading time is much shorter if program is downloaded from the Slave CPU ROM.
As program download is completed mechanical reset is performed
STEP 1
3.1.4.3
Operation description at Emergency Stop
EMERGENCY STOP PUSHBUTTON IS PRESSED
1-each Slave CPU stops immediately its operation. All arms are
immediately moved to the position UP (in order to prevent any
conflict with rotation of sample, reagent and cuvette trays)
2-LED are flashing. If an error is detected, error code is reported by
LEDs.
Note: in Emergency Stop status, the Slave CPUs accept only Reset
Instructions
STEP 1
3.1.4.4
Operation description at system reset
SYSTEM RESET
1-at Reset all mechanical modure are initialized
3.1.4.5
Operation description at system routine analysis
All operations of the ILab600 analyzer system are performed within a timing cycle of 9 seconds (system cycle). After a routine analysis cycle has been started, each CPU performs its tasks following the specific timing indicated below:
Slave CPU
Photometer/cuvette tray
Sample dispencer/sample tray
R1 dispenser/reagent tray
R2 dispenser/sample cup stirrer
Stirrer/washing station
Timing (start time delay)
0.0 sec
0.2 sec
2.6 sec
7.0 sec
12.0 sec
3.10
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Note: the Stirrer/washing station operation starts only during the second System Cycle.
The system checks that all mechanical operations are properly performed within the specific timing. Should any error or delay condition be detected, it will trigger a specific time-out error.
T A S K S
Operation cycles
R a n g e s
3.1.4.6
Operation description of Sample Dispenser
The sample dispenser CPU and ROM control the following items:
1-Sample probe module (probe up/down motor and probe rotation
motor)
2-Sample syringe module (syringe up/down motor)
3-Sample tray (sample tray rotation motor)
4-Probe internal and external rinsing valves
5-Liquid level sensor of sample probe (capacitive)
6-PID bar code reader
The sample dispenser CPU controls the followin operation cycles:
1-the sample probe detects the sample level (in the cup/tube) by
using the liquid level sensor
2-the sample probe aspirates the required volume of sample
from the cup/tube into the sample tray or from the cuvette (diluted
sample) and dispense it into the cuvette
3-the sample dispenser generates the PID bar code read start signal.
The Data will be maneged by the Main CPU
4-the sample probe level sensor detects the remaining volume of
sample to be used for the ISE analysis
5-the operative vertical mechanical travel of the sample probe is
managed by the sample dispenser, by measuring the distance (in
steps) between the probe up position and the bottom of sample cup/
tube
6-the sample probe rinse with detergent
The ranges of the items controlled by the sample dispenser are the following:
1-the sample syringe can mechanically aspirate 64ul maximum of
sample. The max volume is reduced to 60ul by the ROM control
2-the sample tray is divided in position No 1 to 30 on tray outer, 31 to
60 on tray middle and 61 to 75 on tray inner. Only positions No 1 to
60 are available for PID, R1 probe and sample stirrer module
3-sample dispenser can manage: standard cups, micro cups, primary
tubes, standard cups placed into primary tubes and micro cups
placed into primary tubes
4-sample probe can rotate to six positions pre-defined (cuvette,
rinsing pot, detergent, outer middle and inner sample tray)
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.11
Electronics
T A S K S
Operation cycles
3.1.4.7
Operation description of R1 Dispenser
The R1 dispenser CPU and ROM control the following items:
1-R1 probe module (probe up/down motor and probe rotation
motor)
2-R1 syringe module (syringe up/down motor)
3-Reagent tray (reagent tray rotation motor)
4-R1 probe internal and external rinsing valves
5-Liquid level sensor of R1 probe (capacitive)
6-RID bar code reader
The R1 dispenser CPU controls the followin operation cycles:
1-the R1 probe detects the sample level (in the cup/tube) by
using the liquid level sensor
2-the R1 probe aspirates the required volume of reagent
from the bottle into the reagent tray or from and dispense it into the
cuvette
3-the R1 dispenser generates the RID bar code read start signal.
The Data will be maneged by the Main CPU
4-the operative vertical mechanical travel of the R1 probe is
managed by the R1 dispenser, by measuring the distance (in
steps) between the probe up position and the bottom of reagent
bottles (100ml and 20ml)
5-the R1 probe dispense reagent for dilution with sample into the
sample cup in sample tray
6-performs R1 probe rinse with detergent
R a n g e s The ranges of the items controlled by the R1 dispenser are the following:
1-the R1 syringe can mechanically aspirate 660ul maximum of
reagent. The max volume is reduced to 600ul by the ROM control
2-the reagent tray is divided in position No 1 to 32 on tray outer and
32 to 64 on tray inner. The same control is also available for R2
dispenser
3-R1 dispenser can manage standard bottles of 20 and 100ml
4-R1 probe can rotate to eight positions pre-defined (cuvette,
rinsing pot, detergent 1, detergent 2, outer and inner reagent tray,
middle of sample tray)
3.12
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
T A S K S
Operation cycles
R a n g e s
3.1.4.8
Operation description of R2 Dispenser and SPL Stirrer
The R2 dispenser and sample stirrer CPU and ROM control the following items:
1-R2 probe module (probe up/down motor and probe rotation
motor)
2-R2 syringe module (syringe up/down motor)
3-sample stirrer (stirrer up/down motor)
4-stirrer paddle spinning (DC motor)
5-R2 probe internal and external rinsing valves
6-Liquid level sensor of R2 probe (capacitive)
The R2 dispenser and sample stirrer CPU controls the following operation cycles:
1-the R2 probe detects the sample level (in the cup/tube) by
using the liquid level sensor
2-the R2 probe aspirates the required volume of reagent
from the bottle of the reagent tray or from and dispense it into the
cuvette
3-the R2 dispenser performs dilution dispensing (dispenses both
degassed water and reagent simultaneously into the cuvette)
4-the operative vertical mechanical travel of the R2 probe is
managed by the R2 dispenser, by measuring the distance (in
steps) between the probe up position and the bottom of reagent
bottles (100ml and 20ml)
5-the R2 dispenser dispenses detergent into the incubator
6-the R2 dispenser performs R2 probe rinse with detergent
7-sample stirrer mix sample inside sample tray cup during sample
dilution
8-performs stirrer paddle rinse with detergent
The ranges of the items controlled by the R2 dispenser and sample stirrer CPU are the following:
1-the R2 syringe can mechanically aspirate 660ul maximum of
reagent. The max volume is reduced to 600ul by the ROM control
2-R2 dispenser can manage standard bottles of 20 and 100ml
3-R2 probe can rotate to ten positions pre-defined (detergent for
incubator, cuvette, incubator, rinsing pot, detergent 1, detergent 2,
outer and inner reagent tray, middle of sample tray)
4-the sample stirrer can rotate to four positions pre-defined (rinsing
pot, detergent, outer and middle sample tray)
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.13
Electronics
3.1.4.9
Operation description of the Stirrer/Rinse
T A S K S The Stirrer/Rinsing CPU and ROM control the following items:
1-Items related to the internal rinsing of the cuvettes (wash station) a-washing station up/down motor b-control of cuvette rinse feed valves SV31 to SV33 c-control of cuvette rinse feed valves SV42 to SV44 d-control of cuvette rinse feed valves SV81 to SV86
2-Items related to the internal rinsing of the cuvettes (stirrer module) a-stirrer arm (up/down motor, rotation motor) b-spinning of stirrer paddles 1 and 2 c-control of stirrer rinse pot (SV24) d-monitoring of power errors (failure of fuses FS7, FS10)
Valve Details (NC)=Normally Close (NO)=Normally Open
SV24(NC)
SV31(NC)
SV32(NC) feed valve of stirrer rinse pot feed valve of washing probes 1&2 (detergent 1&2) feed valve of washing probes 3 to 5 (pure water)
SV33(NC)
SV42(NO)
SV43(NO)
SV44(NO)
SV81(NC) feed valve of washing probe 6 (tip) depressurizing vacuum pot fluidics for discarding secondary drain from vacuum pot for discarding primary drain (biological) detergent 1 extrusion valve
SV82(NC)
SV83(NC)
SV84(NC)
SV85(NC)
SV86(NC) detergent 1 supply valve detergent 1 charge valve detergent 2 extrusion valve detergent 2 supply valve detergent 2 charge valve
Operation cycles
The R2 stirrer/rinse CPU controls the following operation cycles:
1-washing station: the washing station operates vertical actuation
between the following positions: a-upper position (home position, detected by a specific sensor) b-cuvette port (to dispense water into cuvettes) c-cuvette 2/3 position (to perform rinse with water when detergent
is dispensed d-lower limit (detected by a specific sensor)
2-stirrer module: incudes two stepper motors: for horizontal rotation
and for vertical up/down actuation and two photosensor. Operating
positions of the stirrer module are the following: a- rotational operating:
-rinsing pot: is the home position (detected by encoder)
-cuvette: detected by encoder b-vertical operating:
-upper position: is the home position (detected by sensor)
-lower position for rinsing into the rinsing pot
-lower position for stirring 6mm over the lower limit
-lower limit
3.14
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
T A S K S
3.1.4.10
Operation description of the Photometer/Cuvette Tray
The Photometer CPU and ROM control the following items:
1-driving the cuvette tray
2-acquisition of the photometry data
3-monitoring the light source error
4-monitoring the power error (fuse FS6)
Specifications -16-bit A/D converter enables photometry of 12 wavelenghts
(12channels)
-one cycle is performed in 9 seconds
-one complete revolution of the cuvette tray is performed in 2 cycles
(18 seconds)
-photometry of 40+1 cuvettes is performed in one cycle
-on each photometry cycle the system takes 144 data readings (12
wavelenghts per 12 times) for each cuvette
-on every cycle 1 Data Point is calculated for each wavelength per
cuvette. Data Point is the mean value of the lower 8 readings
-Data Point value is sent to the consolle computer by the Main CPU,
and it is managed as 1 data point of the reaction curve
Flow
Description a-15VDC power supply b-Light source c-Photometry items d-Detector (photo diode array) e-AMP pcb (log amp, A/D converter) f-Slave B CPU (A/D conv, register, CPU) electronics electronics/electrics mechanical electronics electronics electronics g-Photometry control ROM (photometry,selection,
calculation of mean val,saved in DPRAM) electronics h-Main CPU pcb (DPRAM, RS232C) electronics i-consolle PC (RS232C, creation of graph, etc) electronics
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.15
Electronics
Operation
Cycle
3.1.4.11
Operation description of Liquid Level Detection function
Description of sensor reading
a-one sensor electrostatic capacity type is used for detecting the
liquid level b-during liquid level detection cycle the program takes a 16 bits
reading; among the 16 bits readig, 8 bits are selected and managed
as 1 Data Reading. The 8 bits are selected with the following criteria:
Bit # I 16 I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10 I 9 I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 I 1 I
These 8 bites are selected as Data Reading
Operation
Cycle
Description of the liquid level detection subroutine cycles (refer to flow chart:
1-electrostatic capacity reading (reference value) reference value to be used as base line is calculated as follows: the sensor electrostatic capacity is detected 10 times (with sensor in air). The central (MEDIAN) value of the 10 data is considered the reference value
2-electrostatic capacity reading (current value) current value to be used for evaluationg the presence of liquid is calculated as follows: the system starts reading the sensor capacity. the oldest of the
10 readings performed during the reference value reading is erased and replaced by the current value data, and the new average value is calculated.
3-difference calculation (variation) system performs the following calculation:
Variation = Current Value - Reference Value
As variation value reaches the set limits, liquid detection status is triggered to YES. The variation value depends on the vertical position of the probe, and is set as per values indicated in table
1 in next pages.
4-check "is probe above the upper edge of the cup?" this is a further check performed after liquid detection is triggered to YES. If presence of liquid is detected within an area that is calculated to be over the upper edge of the cup, error condition is triggered and warning is reported.
5-check "has the probe reached low limit?" if the probe reaches the low limit without detecting liquid presence, a warning "sample/reagent short" is triggered
3.16
Instrumentation Laboratory
Fig 3.5
Flow chart Liquid level detection flow chart
ILab600 Service Manual
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.17
Electronics
TABLE 1 Values of Variation of sample and reagent probes on the different conditions
1 - Standard cup distance from sample level to lower limit Variation value
34.95mm or higher 6 from 27.45 to 34.95mm
from 12.45 to 27.45mm
12.45mm or lower
2 - Micro cup
8
6
6 distance from sample level to lower limit Variation value
35.25mm or higher 6 from 30 to 35.25mm
from 20.1 to 30mm
8
6
20.1mm or lower
3 - Primary tube
6 distance from sample level to lower limit Variation value
99mm or higher 6 from 66 to 99mm 10 from 33 to 66mm
33mm or lower
8
6
4 - Standard cup inside tube distance from sample level to lower limit Variation value
34.95mm or higher from 27.45 to 34.95mm
from 12.45 to 27.45mm
12.45mm or lower
6
8
6
6
5 - Micro cup inside tube distance from sample level to lower limit Variation value
35.25mm or higher from 30 to 35.25mm
6
8 from 20.1 to 30mm
20.1mm or lower
6
6
3.18
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
6 - 20ml standard bottle and 20 ml special bottle distance from reagent level to lower limit Variation value
96.6mm or higher 99 from 64.35 to 96.6mm
from 32.25 to 64.35 mm
32.25mm or lower
12
10
8
7 - 100ml standard bottle and 100 ml special bottle distance from reagent level to lower limit Variation value
97.95mm or higher from 65.25 to 97.95mm
99
12 from 32.7 to 65.25 mm
32.7mm or lower
10
8
Operation
Cycle
Description of speed control of probe-down operation during liquid level detection
the sample tray can manage the following models of sample cups: standard cup 3ml, micro cup, primary tubes (13x100, 16x100,
13x75, 16x74), standard cups placed into primary tube and micro cup placed into primary tube.
The reagent tray can manage 20ml and 100ml bottles
The control of the probe down speed is not the same for all the models of cups/bottles, but it has beem optimized as follows:
1 - Standard cup and micro cup
Figure 3.6 above shows diagram of sample probe travellig.
area B: sample probe is drived with accelerated/decelerated speed initial speed=500pps final speed=1250pps total travel=330pulses
Note:if liquid level is detected in this area error is reported
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.19
Electronics area A: sample probe is drived at constant speed speed=500pps max travel=229pulses
Note:after liquid detection, probe is drived 4 more steps
downward
2 - Primary tube
Figure 3.7 above shows diagram of sample probe travelling
Area A: sample probe is driven with accelerated/decelerated speed initial speed=500pps final speed=950pps
Note:after liquid detection, probe is drived 4 more steps
downward
Note:if liquid level is detected over the top border of the
tube an error is reported
3 - Standard cup and micro cup inside primary tube
3.20
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Figure 3.8 above shows diagram of sample probe travelling
Area A: sample probe is drived with constant speed speed: 500pps max travel: 293pulses
Note:after liquid detection, probe is driven 4 more steps
downward
Note:if liquid level is detected over the top border of the
cup an error is reported
4 - Reagent bottle
Operation
Cycle
Figure 3.9 above shows diagram of reagent probe travelling
Area A: reagent probe is driven with accelerated/decelerated s p e e d initial speed=500pps final speed=950pps max travel=770pulses
Note:after liquid detection, probe is decelerate to a low speed of 500pps during a period of 5 to 12 pulses, then stopped
Note:if liquid level is detected over the top border of the
bottle an error is reported
Description of the probe control after liquid level detection
As the probe sensor has detected the liquid level, the system starts liquid (sample or reagent) aspiration, and at the same time the probe is driven a few pulses downward, following the decrease of liquid into the cup/bottle. This cycle is called "Follow-Up Move Down" cycle
(FUMD). The FUMD cycle is performed only when aspiration is performed in standard cup, micro cup, 20 and 100 ml bottles. No
FUMD cycle is performed when sample aspiration is performed in tube. FUMD cycle specifications are the following:
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.21
Electronics
1 - Standard cup
The number of pulses of FUMD cycle is set according to:
1:the sample volume required
2:the position of liquid level detection inside the cup
Figure 3.10 above shows the cup divided in 3 areas. The number of pulses of FUMD cycle is set as follows:
area of spl detection
A
A
A
B
A
A
B
C
C
sample vol req.(ul)
5 or less from 6 to 10 from 11 to 20 from 21 to 40
41 or more
40 or less
41 or more
40 or less
41 or more
pulses
2
6
10
14
18
6
12
0
6
2 - Micro cup
The number of pulses of FUMD cycle is set according to:
1:the sample volume required
2:the position of liquid level detection inside the cup
3.22
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Figure 3.11 above shows the cup divided in 3 areas. The number of pulses of FUMD cycle is set as follows:
area of spl detection
A
A
A
B
A
A
B
B
B
B
C
C
sample vol req.(ul)
10 or less from 11 to 20 from 21 to 30 from 31 to 40
41 or more
10 or less from 11 to 20 from 21 to 30 from 31 to 40
41 or more
20 or less
21 or more
pulses
3
8
13
16
23
0
0
6
3
6
10
15
3 - Reagent bottle
The number of pulses of FUMD cycle for reagent aspiration is set as follows:
1-20ml bottle: 7 pulses
2-100ml bottle: 0 pulses
T A S K S
3.1.4.12
Operation description of the Timer
The Timer assy performs the following tasks:
1-controls the power supply of the system by Solid State Relay
2-manages the system power switch and the power LED
3-tracks date and time
Specifications the timer board is equipped by a ROM that is programmed to perform the following operations:
1-controls the timer that tracks the clock (year, month, day, hour,
minute, second
2-monitors the status of the Main Power switch, and turns ON the
system power according to the status of Main Power switch
3-saves the Timer schedule (sent from the Main CPU) and controls
automatic start-up e shut-down
4-information on date and time and timer schedule are saved by
battery backup power system, they are therefore saved also in the
case of power failure
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.23
Electronics
Operation
Cycles
1-initialization of the Timer CPU at ILab power ON is performed as
follows: a-the ROM of the Timer CPU checks the the ID code, the SRAM
and the timer.
b-if no error is detected the LED 2 (power interruption) is turned
ON c-if any corruption is detected the ROM clears the SRAM, sets
the current date and time to 96-1-1 00:00:00 and clears startup
schedule. LED 1 (initialization) is turned ON
2-inizialization of the Timer CPU at ILab Reset (by pressing the Reset
switch) is performed as follows: a-the ROM of the Timer CPU checks the timer.
b-if no problem is detected the ROM clears the SRAM and the
autostartup schedule. LED 2 (power interruption) is turned
ON c-If any problem is detected in the timer, the ROM clears the
SRAM, set the current date and time to 96-1-1 00:00:00 and
clears startup schedule. LED 1 (initialization) is turned ON
3.1.4.12.1
Location of the Timer Assy
The Timer assy can be accessed from the rear of the ILab600 system, as shown in figure below
Figure 3.12 - Location of timer assy
3.24
The timer assy consists of the Timer board, the DC power supply, the noise filter, the fuse and the fan.
The Timer pcb is equipped by a microprocessor and a ROM.
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Figure 3.13 - Timer assy
3.1.5
Drivers
Power drivers required for driving all the motors, solenoid valves and sensors of the ILab600 system are located in two specific
PCBs:
1. Driver A pcb
2. Driver B pcb
Specific tasks of each pcb are highlighted by block diagrams in fig 3.8 and 3.8.
3.1.6
Temperature control
3.1.6.1
Incubator Temperature
To be provided
3.1.6.2
Reagent compartment temperature
To be provided
3.1.7
DC Power distribution
Block diagrams of DC power distribution is reported in figure
3.10
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.25
Figure 3.14 - I/O Driver A interconnection diagram
Sample Dispenser Arm Vertical Motor
Sample Dispenser Arm Horizontal Motor
Sample Dispenser Arm Vertical Sensor
Sample Dispenser Arm Horizontal Sensor
PCB ASSY,SENSOR LQ
(Level Sensor,
Shock Sensor)
Reagent 1 Dispenser Arm Vertical Motor
Reagent 1 Dispenser Arm Horizontal Motor
Reagent 1 Dispenser Arm Vertical Sensor
Reagent 1 Dispenser Arm Horizontal Sensor
PCB ASSY,SENSOR LQ
(Level Sensor,
Shock Sensor)
Reagent 2 Dispenser Arm Vertical Motor
Reagent 2 Dispenser Arm Horizontal Motor
Reagent 2 Dispenser Arm Vertical Sensor
Reagent 2 Dispenser Arm Horizontal Sensor
PCB ASSY,SENSOR LQ
(Level Sensor,
Shock Sensor)
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN6
6p CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN6
6p CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN6
SV81
SV82
SV83
SV84
SV85
SV86
Reagent Table Horizontal Motor
Reagent Table Horizontal Sensor
Sample Table Horizontal Motor
Sample Table Horizontal Sensor
Sample Table Number Sensor
Sampling LED
Instrumentation Laboratory
Electronics
PCB ASSY,I/O DRIVER A
Vertical Motor Output
Horizontal Motor Output
Sensor Input
Sample
Dispenser
Motor Driver
IC
Vertical Motor Output
Horizontal Motor Output
Sensor Input
Reagent 1
Dispenser
Motor Driver
IC
Vertical Motor Output
Horizontal Motor Output
Sensor Input
Reagent 2
Dispenser
Motor Driver
IC
+24V
FUSE X 5
FUS
Detergent Valve Control Line
+24V
FUS
Horizontal Motor
Output
Sensor Input
Reagent
Table Control
Motor Driver
IC
Horizontal Motor
Output
Sensor Input
CN7 Table Number Input
Sampling LED Output
Sample
Table Control
Motor Driver
IC
+ -
+5V
3.26
Figure 3.15 - I/O Driver B interconnection diagram
PCB ASSY,I/O DRIVER B
Cuvette Control
Motor Driver
Horizontal Motor Output
Sensor Input
Rinse Control
Motor Driver
Vertical Motor Output
Sensor Input
Stirrer Control
Motor Driver
Motor Driver
DC Motor Ctrl C
Vertical Motor Output
Horizontal Motor Output
Stirrer Paddle Output
Sensor Input
+5V
Sample Dispenser
Pump Control
Motor Driver IC
Vertical Motor Output
Pump Valve Output
Sensor Input
RGT 1 Dispenser
Pump Control
Motor Driver
Vertical Motor Output
Pump Valve Output
Sensor Input
RGT 2 Dispenser
Pump Control
Motor Driver
Vertical Motor Output
Pump Valve Output
Sensor Input
FUSE
+24V
(FUSE X 5)
FUSE +24V
Degassed Water Press SW Input
Degassed Water Valve Output
Degasser Control
Vacuum Tank Control
CN12(8
p)
Drain Pot Valve Output
Pure Water Valve Output
Pure Water Level SW Input
Pure Water IN/OUT Valve
Output
Reservoir Valve Output
CN11(6
p)
CN10(6
p)
CN9(14
p)
2 p
2 p
2 p
2 p
TANK
UNIT
ASSY
VACCUM
DEGASSER
UNIT ASSY
2 p
2 p
2 p
2 p
2 p
1 SV7
4 p
2 p
2 p
2 p
2 p
2 p
1 SV2 2 SV2 3 SV2 4 SV2
VALVE ASSY
PURE WATER
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Cuvette Horizontal Motor
PCB ASSY,
PHOTOSENSOR
Rinse Vertical Motor
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN
6
CN
2
CN
3
CN
4
Rinse Top Sensor
Rinse Bottom Sensor
Stirrer Arm Vertical Motor
Stirrer Arm Horizontal Motor
Stirrer Arm Vertical Sensor
Stirrer Arm Horizontal Sensor
Stirrer Paddle (DC Motor)
Sample Dispenser Pump Vertical Motor
Sample Dispenser Pump Valve
Sample Dispenser Pump Vertical Sensor
CN
2
CN
CN
3
4
Reagent 1 Dispenser Pump Vertical Motor
Reagent 1 Dispenser Pump Valve
Reagent 1 Dispenser Pump Vertical Sensor
CN
CN
2
CN
3
4
DGW SW
SV31
SV32
SV33
SV34
(2p x 5)
SV42
SV43
SV44
DRAIN POT ASSY
Reagent 2 Dispenser Pump Vertical Motor
Reagent 2 Dispenser Pump Valve
Reagent 2 Dispenser Pump Vertical Sensor
3.27
Electronics
Figure 3.16 - DC Power interconnection
AC100V 1.0A Input
SW REGULATOR ASSY
Noise Filter
Switching
Regulator
TRANSFORMER 400
MAIN
1.5KVA
TRANSFORMER 400
COOLER
400VA
+5V,+-12V Output
+5V Output
PCB ASSY,DC
POWER
+24V Output
+24V Output to FAN
(Not
Used)
FAN of DC POWER BOX
CN
2
(9p)
AC30V 5.0A Input
DC24V(A)
Power Supply
AC30V5.0A
Input
AC15V 3.0A
Input
AC10.0V 11A Input
DC24V(B)
Power
Supply
Lamp
Power
Supply
Incubator
Thermp
Module
Power
Supply
+24V Output to I/O Driver A
+24VA Active Signal Output
+24VA Shut Down Singnal Input
+24V Output to I/O Driver A
+24V Output to ISE and FAN
+24VB Active Signal Output
+24VB Shut Down Singnal Input
+12V Output to Lamp
Lamp Active Signal Output
Lamp Shut Down Singnal Input
+12V Output to FAN
+12V Output to ITM
ITM Active Signal Output
ITM Shut Down Signal Input
CN3
(6p))
CN1
7
(2p)
Thermo Module
Controller
Reagent Cooler ON/OFF
Signal Output
AC10.0V 11A Input
AC10.0V 11A Input
AC10.0V 11A Input
Thermistor
Input
Cooler Shut Down Signal
Cooler
Thermo Mod. 1
Power Supply
Cooler
Thermo Mod. 2
Power Supply
Cooler
Thermo Mod. 3
Power Supply
+12V Output to FAN
+12V Output to Thermo Module 1
+12V Output to Barcode
Reader
+12V Output to Thermo Module 2
(Not Used)
+12V Output to Thermo Module 3
AC25.0V 1.0A Input
Analog +12V
Power Supply
Analog +12V Output
Analog Ground
+24V Output
+24V Output to FAN
(Not Used)
To I/O
Driver
A
To I/O Drive B
To I/O
Driver
A
REACTION ASSY
Lamp
FAN
TM +
Thermo Module
TM -
AC16V 2A
Input
CN
1
(3p)
Convert to
+-15V
+-15V
CN3(5p) CN4(2p)
+5V
Output
To Driver
Mother
Convert to +5V
And +-15V
+5V Output
+-15V Output
+24V Output
FAN of Barcode
Reader
PCB ASSY,TEMP CONT
Thermistor
FAN
TM1
TM1-
Thermo Module 1
TM2
TM2-
Thermo Module 2
TM3
TM3-
Thermo Module 3
(CN7,8,
9,10)
To PCB ASSY,AMP CN3
To PCB ASSY,
ISE MAIN CN1
To FAN of Analyzing Unit
FAN of DC POWER BOX
3.28
Instrumentation Laboratory
Fig 3.17
ILab600 Service Manual
3.1.8
AC Power distribution
Diagram of AC Power distribution is shown in fig 3.17 and 3.18
Fig 3.18
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.29
Electronics
3.1.9
Operation of PID
Specifications 1. SPECIFICATIONS OF THE READER
Method: laser beam barcode reader
Wavelenght: 670 nm
Max output: 1.2 mW
Pulse lenght: 127 uul uS
Class 2 laser product (JIS C6802 (1991))
Applicable barcode standards: INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (ITF)
CODE 39
CODABAR (NW-7)
J A N
Barcode digits: max. 16 digits
2. SPECIFICATIONS OF THE LABEL
Bar module: Narrow width: 0.25 to 1.0 mm
Bar lenght: 12 mm or more
PCS value: 0.6 or more (reflecting rate of white: 75% or higher)
Label lenght: max 80 mm (with a 5 mm border not used)
Positioning of label on the tube: refer to fig. 3.x below material: the material of the label and the printing should be not aging in normal use conditions
Fig 3.19 - bar code labels
3.30
3.2
Check-out and Adjustments
3.2.1
Dip switches default configurations
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
3.2.1.1Main CPU pcb
Set Dip Switch of Main CPU pcb with the ILab600 power OFF
Bit No Task
8 send SW from Card
7 simulating each unit
6 simulating PC
Default
OFF
OFF
OFF
5 DEMO OFF
4 Sample Stirring module ON=w/mod; OFF=w/out mod.
3 RID module
2 PID module
1 ISE module
ON=w/RID; OFF=w/out RID
ON=w/PID; OFF=w/out PID
ON=w/ISE; OFF=w/out ISE
SLAVE CPUs A AND B
To be supplied (refer to label on cover of cardcage)
3.2.2
Electronic adjustments
3.2.2.1
Adjustment of Photometer Lamp Voltage (DC Power pcb)
Measure voltage on Test Points, check that all voltage are within tolerance. Adjust by specific trimmer if required.
Test Points
TP4-TP5(gnd)
TP3-TP2(gnd)
TP1-TP2(gnd)
Voltage
11.50VDC
2.60VDC
5.00VDC
Tolerance
+/-10mV
+/-20mV
+/-50mV
Trimmer
VR3
VR2
VR1
3.2.2.2
Adjustment of Reagent Tray Temperature (DC Power pcb)
a. Locate the DC Power pcb. Connect a Digital Voltmeter between TP3 and TP2 (ground). If necessary, adjust VR-2 to obtain a voltage of 2.56 vdc ± 20 mv.
b. On the DC Power pcb disconnect the Reagent Tray thermistor
CN-8. Connect a Digital Voltmeter between TP1 and TP2
(ground). If necessary, adjust VR-1 to obtain a voltage of
5.00vdc ± 50mv.
c. Reconnect the Reagent Tray thermistor CN-8.
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.31
Electronics
3.2.2.3
Adjustment of Temperature Contr. pcb
1 . Calibrate the test box. The test box output for the 37°C mode must be adjusted to 8.521KW. Set switch B to 37°C position and connect an ohmmeter to the cable connector pins 9 and 7.
Adjust pot to 8.521KW.
Figure 3.20 - Temperature adjustment tool
3.32
2. Connect the test box to CN12 on the Temp Control PCB. Turn on power. (see figure 6.21 Temp Control pcb)
3. Make sure that LED19 (bath water level sensor status) is extinguished while the switch “A” on the test box is closed, and that LED19 is lit while switch “A” is open. Close switch “A”.
4. Connect the digital voltmeter between TP3 (ground) and TP8. If necessary adjust VR1 to 5.0vdc ±10mV. Paint lock VR1.
5. Set the switch to “37°C”. Connect the digital voltmeter between
TP3 (ground) and TP10. If necessary adjust VR3 to -3.7vdc
±10 mV. Paint lock VR3.
6. Connect the digital voltmeter between TP3 (ground) and TP9. If necessary adjust VR2 (heater control) to +3.7vdc ±10mV.
7. Connect the digital voltmeter between TP3 (ground) and TP11.
If necessary adjust VR4 (display reading) to 0vdc ±20mV.
8. Disconnect the test box and reconnect CN12 on the Temp
Control bd.
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 3.21 - Temperature control pcb
ILab600 Service Manual
3.2.2.4
Adjustment of PID (and RID) scanners
a. Remove the top cover of the analyzer in order to access to the
PID (or RID) scanner.
b. Place some sample tubes with ID labels in the external (i.e pos.
1) and middle position (i.e. pos 31) of the sample tray
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.33
Electronics
(external and internal position of the reagent tray) c. Turn ON the ILab system d. Enter in the "HW Maintenance" menù and set the Sample tray as follows: move to: internal sample position where the sample tube with label has been placed (i.e. pos 31) and stop to: sample bar code reading position (set the Reagent tray as
follows: move to: internal RGT position where the RGT bottle with label has been placed and stop to: RGT bar code
reading position) e. In the "HW Maintenance" menù set the PID (RID) reader to
"Test ON".
CAUTION: Never look directly into the laser light beam, eye injury may occur.
f. Check the reading performance of the scanner by verifying the
LED indications (ref. to figure below)
Figure 3.22 - PID/RID scanner
STB
•
OK/NG
•
TIMING
•
LASER ON
3.34
g. At this time LEDs TIMING ON and LASER ON LED are ON.
LED OK/NG should be ON green color, if it is ON red color the scanner has to be adjusted. The LED bar STABILITY LEDs should be all LEDs ON if not the scanner has to be adjusted.
(Same procedure for RID).
h. If scanner has to be adjusted, loosed the screws A and B and adjust the position of the scanner in order to get the performance required (LED OK/NG should be ON green color. The
LED bar STABILITY LEDs should be all LEDs ON). (Same
procedure for RID).
i. Move the sample tray to an external sample position where the sample tube with label has been placed and check the scanner performance by repeating the above procedure.
(Same procedure for RID ).
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 3.23 - Alignment of PID/RID scanner
ILab600 Service Manual
Screws A
Screws B
l. Power OFF the ILab600 and re-place all covers.
3.2.2.4
Adjustment of Probe Liquid Level Sensor
This procedure is intended to be used for the adjustment of the sensitivity of the Sample, R1 and R2 probes liquid level sensors.
This procudure should be performed in the following situations:
1. When a probe is replaced.
2. Whenever sample/reagent misdetections occur during analysis.
Adjust Probe Liquid Level Sensor as follows:
1. From the H/W Maintenance menu open the Sample Probe or
Reagent Probe screen.
2. Click on Reset once. The probe performs the reset operation and then performs a water rinse in the rinse cup. This fills the probe with water.
Note: If it is not filled with water, the liquid level sensor cannot be adjusted accurately. Do not skip this step.
3. In the Replacement area click on Move for Replacement. After the reset operation, the dispensing arm tension is off, allowing the rotation of the probe by hand to the desired working position on the sample or reagent tray.
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.35
Electronics
4. Remove the arm cover and slide cover
5. There is a rotary switch and red LED’s in the inside of the sheet metal on the arm’s right side.
Figure 3.24 - Adjustment of liquid level sensor
LED
Rotary switch
Figure 3.25
3.36
6. Turn the arrow on the rotary switch clockwise from 0 to F using a small screwdriver. The red LED’s will go ON and OFF as the arrow is turned. Set the rotary switch to the largest number under which the red LED stays OFF. As an example, In the figure below, the LED’s are OFF between N° 5 and N° 9 of the rotary switch. The rotary switch must therefore be set at N° 9. A dimly lit LED is considered to be OFF.
E x a m p le o f se ttin g :
= L E D i s O N
= L E D i s O F F
N u m b e rs from 0 t o F a r e t h e p o s i t i o n s o f r o t a r y s w i t c h
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Set this position o f r o t a r y s w i t c h
7. After the setting is completed, fill the sample cup with water and immerse the probe in it. If the LED’s which were OFF turn
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
ON, the probe has been set correctly.
8. Reinstall the arm cover and slide cover. Return the probe to the standby position. Close the Sample Probe screen and
H/W Maintenance menu.
Figure 3.26 - adjustment of liquid level sensor
As sensor get in contact with water the LED must go to ON
Water
Instrumentation Laboratory
3.37
ILab600 Service Manual
4.0 Mechanics
4.1 General description of the system
The ILab 600 includes several dedicated modules which perform the following tasks:
1. Sample dispensing
The analyzer provides detection, sampling and dispensing of programmed sample volumes. To provide this the analyzer incorporates the use of several mechanical modules and commands from the System PC in performing this task. The
Sampler dispensing module (includes sample sensing), the sample syringe module and the sample tray module provide this operation.
2. Reagent dispensing
The analyzer provides reagent detection, aspiration and dispensing of
4 separate reagents on the analyzer. The reagents are programmed and volumes set by the System PC into two classes,
Reagent 1 st
/ 3 rd
and Reagent 2 nd
/ 4 th
. The analyzer incorporates several mechanical modules and provides programming commands from the System PC. in performing this task. The R1/R2 reagent dispensing modules (includes reagent sensing), R1/R2 syringe modules and the reagent tray module, together provide this operation.
3. Sample stirring:
The sample stirrer assembly provides the stirring for diluted or treated samples on the sample tray assembly only, not at the reaction cuvettes. This is an optional assembly.
4. Photometer/Reaction tray:
The reaction tray is a turn table type, which includes 81 reaction cuvettes that are assembled in 9 sections. The reaction tray can be removed entirely and reaction cuvettes removed separately. The nine (9) assembled sections can be removed, but only for replacement purpose. The reaction takes place within the cuvette, in a thermo-controlled environment, and is measured by the photometer.
5. Wash Reaction Cells:
The wash station evacuates, washes and fills the cuvettes with degassed water, which allows the photometer to check their optical quality. The wash stations 1 st
probe will evacuate the cuvettes waste into a Bio-Hazard waste container. The waste tank will have a 20 litre capacity and will alert the system between 16-17 litres.
This may be selectable at the instrument service level. Wash probes 1 and 2 dispense detergent (acid and alkai) when washing cuvettes.
6. Sample tray:
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.1
Mechanics
The sample tray has 75 positions which are divided into three rings.
There are 30 positions in the outer ring and 30 positions in the middle ring, both are bar code readable. The inner ring holds only
15 positions, which are not bar code readable. The 75 sample positions allows primary tubes, cups, or micro cups. They are held by the tray which rotates to present the samples to the sample aspirator. Up to three sample trays can be used. Sample trays are identified by a magnetic sensor.
7. Reagent tray:
The reagent tray has 64 positions placed in a circular manner. Both the outer ring and inner ring are bar code readable. The outer most ring slots allows placement for the 20ml and 50ml reagent containers. The inner ring allows for 20ml, 50ml and 100ml reagent containers. They are held by the tray and rotated to the reagent aspirator.
4.1.1 General operation
1. Start up
Perform the pre-work check-up, set the reagents, set the detergents perform the maintenance, such as cell washing and performing water blanks, then prepare the analyzer for analysis.
2. Enter the request and create the worklist
Enter the analysis test of each sample from the mouse or keyboard in accordance with the menu that is displayed on the CRT, then register the request and create the work list. This supplies the positions of the samples to be placed on the sample tray assembly.
4.2
3. Placing the samples.
Place the samples, cups or primary tubes either serum, urine, etc. onto the sample tray assembly. Be certain that the samples placed in the tray match with the numbers displayed for the work list. The system can accommodate up to three sample trays, tray 1, 2, and 3. When entering the request be selective to the tray that is present.
4. Start the analysis
Click the (start) button on the operation menu screen or the start key on the analyzers front key pad.
5. Starting the analysis operation
The sample tray turns and the tray number is read. The system PC confirms the tray to the work list and sends the work list to the analyzing module. The analyzer begins its operations in accordance with the work list that it has received.
6. Rinsing the cuvettes and measuring the water blank.
The cuvette wash station begins to wash the cuvettes. The reaction disk turns 40 +1 cuvette in 9 sec, so each reaction cuvette is rinsed in each cycle while stepping forward. At the same moment the
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
photometer measures the absorbance of 41 reaction cuvettes going through the optical axis in 1 cycle. Cuvette blanking water is dispensed into the rinsed and clean cuvettes. A measurement is taken of the cuvette and the value will be regarded as the basic data for absorbance to be measured later. In the cuvette that has just finished being blanked, the cuvette blanking water is evacuated and removed. Then the cuvette is dried and moved to the sample position.
7. Dispensing the sample
As the reaction cuvette moves to the sample position, the probe moves to the position above the sample tray and decends down into the sample. When the level sensor detects that the tip of the probe has entered the sample, the sample probe stops moving and aspirates the specified volume of sample. Then the probe moves to the position above the cuvette, decends down until the tip of the sample probe touches the bottom of the cuvette and discharges the sample. After that the sample probe moves to the rinsing pot where the inner and the outer surfaces are rinsed with rinsing water. This rinsing operation is omitted if the same sample is used in the next analysis. Rinsing is performed every time a different sample is analyzed.
8. Dispensing the first reagent
Immediately after the sample probe dispenses the sample and moves to the rinse pot, the first reagent probe moves to the reaction cuvette and the reagent is dispensed. The reagent probe has already aspirated its programmed amount of reagent prior to sample dispensing.
When the reagent probe aspirates and dispenses the reagent, it moves in a circular orbit to the position above the reagent bottle for the specified test, and moves down. When the probe sensor detects that the tip of the probe has entered the reagent it stops moving down and aspirates a specified volume of reagent. The reagent probe moves over the reaction cuvette and dispenses the reagent into the cell.
Further more the probe moves to the rinsing pot where the inner and outer surfaces are rinsed with rinsing water.
9. First stirring operation
The reaction cuvette in which the first reagent is dispensed moves
40+1 cells and stops in the stirring position where the cuvette stirrer moves over head and then moves down into the cell and provides mixing. After mixing takes place the assembly is raised and moved to the wash pot where rinsing of the stirrer takes place.
10. Photometry measurement
When stirring of the first reagent is finished, measurement takes place.
Photometry is repeatedly performed every time the reaction cell travels through the optical axis of the photometer until the reaction period is expired.
11. Dispensing and stirring the second reagent
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.3
Mechanics
When a second reagent is selected in the test, it will be dispensed
5min after the first reagent was dispensed. One cycle later the stirring at the cell is performed.
12. Analyzing the next sample
After the requirements of the first sample are met and dispensed into cuvettes, the next sample is consecutively analyzed. However, if the worklist of an emergency Stat sample is sent to the analyzing module, it is given first priority.
13. Completion of the routine analysis
9.6 min maximum after the first reagent is added measurements for the first normal analysis are complete. If the final measurement point is earlier than that, its analysis is finished when all its measuring points are read. After measurements the absorbencies or changes in absorbance are converted into the concentration unit, the data is processed and the output is sent to the CRT display and printed.
14. Rinsing the reaction cell
The reaction solution (sample/reagent) of the reaction cuvette in which the analysis is finished is aspirated by the wash station. The cuvette is rinsed with detergents, rinsed with rinsing water and measured again with a cell blank, so the cuvette can be used in later analysis.
15. Measurement in auto rerun
If the auto rerun is set, and the analysis result satisfies the rerun logic, the sample tray turns to the corresponding sample position and the sample is measured again. Accordingly, even if the sampling is finished the system will regard the sample active, until the result is obtained and no abnormalities are detected or rerun results are obtained. At this time the analysis is complete.
16. The 2 reaction cycle analysis
The instrument has the ability to measure 2-reaction rounds testing.
This will incorporate a third and a fourth reagent. The third reagent will be added 12.2 min after the first reagent and the fourth reagent will be added 17.2 min after the first. The maximum measurement period is
21.8 min .
There are no applications at this time and this cycle should only be noted.
4.2 General description of the mechanics operation cycle.
The main CPU manages the jobs of the entire analyzer. During power up the main CPU Boots its ROM program, the Slave CPUs stop all operations.
They compare their ROM programs, and if the Main CPU ROM program is a higher rev, this will be loaded into the slaves RAM and that program will be executed, but if they are the same the system will execute the current program to run.
4.4
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
4.2.1 Controlling systems
The slave CPUs are paired to provide system functions such as, drive motors, read sensors and so on. Listed below are the pairs that drive the mechanics of the analyzer.
1. Sample dispenser / Sample tray.
2. R1 dispenser / Reagent tray.
3. R2 dispenser / Sample cup stirrer
4. Stirrer assembly / Rinsing module
Photometer / Reaction tray
The slave CPUs operate exclusively when operating independently.
Once the Main CPU starts a command cycle, the slave CPUs will carry it out, without any instruction from the main. After the task is complete the main will monitor a task complete and this time the slaves will only allow a new task command from the main. While such commands are executed, any other command except emergency stop cannot be carried out. Information transfer between the slave CPUs is exclusive, and performed so that each mechanism does not collide with another.
The Slave CPUs as well as the Main CPU utilize Dip Switches to perform “Off-Line” functions such as Sensor Checks, Probe
Movements, etc. Refer to the tables for Dip Switch settings and corresponding functions.
4.2.2 Operation at power on
When the system is turned on, all the slave CPUs start up the common program for download. This program is located in the ROM of the slave
CPUs. During boot up all mechanical elements such as motors are non operational because of the processing being performed inside the slave
CPU. At this time, the execution program is transferred to RAM on the slave CPU. The rev number of the Main CPU ROM card is compared to the rev number written to the slave CPUs ROM chip. If there is a difference the latest rev from the card will be downloaded to the RAM on the slave CPUs to run. This takes considerable time to transfer, but if they match the transfer operation is not performed.
However, when the DIP switch is set to off-line mode, the download program is not executed. The contents of the ROM on the slave CPU will be transferred to the RAM on the slave CPU and executed. If a bug is present on the off-line program, the ROM itself should be changed.
4.2.3 Operation in emergency stop
When the emergency stop button is depressed, all the slave CPUs are simultaneously stopped for the emergency request. Each slave CPU in the emergency stop status immediately stops operation. In the emergency
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.5
Mechanics
stop status, the LED on the slave flashes with the error code indicated. In the stop status, the reset instruction can be accepted.
4.2.4 Operation reset
When the system is requested to reset, the Main CPU resets all Slave
CPUs and the mechanics are reinitialized.
4.2.5 General description on the routine analysis
Keep in mind that the Ilab600 cycle timing is in 9 second intervals. The slave CPU also performs the same operation every 9 seconds during the routine of the analysis.
Note: When analysis is started or shut down slightly different operations are performed such as cell washing and rinsing are performed. For details, refer to the description on the Main CPU.
The routine analysis is controlled by the Main CPU and started by a command given by the Main. The operation start time varies depending on each Slave CPU. The start time is shown in table 4.1. The operation start time of the Photometer/ cell tray is used as reference.
Table 4.1
Operation start times
Slave CPU
Photometer/Cell tray
Sample dispenser/Sample tray
R1 dispenser/Reagent tray
R2 dispenser/Sample cup stirrer
Stirrer/Washing module
Operation start time
0.0 sec.
0.2 sec.
2.6 sec.
7.0 sec.
12 sec.
Stirring / Washing module starts up the operation more than 9 seconds later because stirring inside the cell is performed in the next cycle after dispensing of the second reagent is finished.
The time is managed closely for each operation during routine analysis. If an operation is not finished within the specified operation time, a time out error occurs.
4.2.5b Off-Line Mode Switch Settings and LED Patterns
The system can be put into the Off-Line Mode by utilizing the Dip Switches located on the Slave “A’ CPU and Slave “B” CPU pcb’s. While in the Off-
Line mode the arms can be moved, magnetization patterns checked or set, and LED status can be checked by changing the dip switch positions.
Each control circuit on the Slave CPU’s (Sample Dispenser, R1 Dispenser,
R2 Dispenser, Stirrer/Rinse, and Photometer) have an 8 position dip
4.6
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
switch (for Off-Line functions), LED’s, local reset switch and a 2 position dip switch (for phase pattern).
The operation of the Off-Line Mode Dip Switch is indicated in table 4.2:
(default is all bits OFF).
Table 4.2
Off-Line mode dip switch operation
Bit 7: ON to enter Off-Line Mode
Bit 8: Change position to activate function in off-line mode
Bit 6: ON to release vertical motor power after rotation command is executed
Bit 5: ON to activate stirrer paddle after stirrer rotation command is executed
Refer to figure 4.1 for locations of switches and Tables 4.4 (sample, R1,
R2), 4.5 (stirrer / rinse), and 4.6 (photometer) for bit position functions. For
Sensor Check LED Status refer to Table 4.7.
Figure 4.1
Off-Line Mode switch locations
The key for Off-Line mode Dip switch positions is indicated in table
4.3. These are common for switch settings for the Slave “A” and Slave
“B” CPU pcb’s.
Table 4.3
Dip switch symbols / indications
Symbol x p y
Indication of Switch Position
Indicates switch bit ON
Indicates switch bit OFF
Indicates switch bit position change (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF)
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.7
Mechanics
Table 4.4
Sample / R1 / R2 Off-Line Mode dip switch settings
Dip Switch Sample Dispenser
1 2 3 4 5 6 Contents o o o o o o
Initialize all motors x o o o o o
Initialize Probe and Syringe o x o o o o
Initialize Sample disk x x o o o o
Put out PID trigger signal
(The signal put out only once) o o o x o y
Probe rotates cell position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate) x o o x o y
Probe rotate rinse pot position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate) o x o x o y
Probe rotate detergent position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate) x x o x o y
Probe rotate S-disk outer position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate) o o x x o y
Probe rotate S-disk mid position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate) x o x x o y
Probe rotate S-disk inner position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate) o x x x o y x x x x o y o o o o x y
R1 Dispenser
Contents
Initialize all motors
Initialize Probe and Syringe
Initialize Reagent disk
Put out RID trigger signal
(The signal put out only once)
Probe rotate cell position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate incubator position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate rinsing pot position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate detergent 1 position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate detergent 2 position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate R-disk outer position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate R-disk inner position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate S-disk mid position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate) x o o o x y o x o o x y x x o o x y o o x x x x x x x x x x
Check ISE status
(Indicate LED see table xxxxx x o x x x x
Check level sensor
(Indicate LED see table xxxx o x x x x x
Set phase pattern
Check sensors
(Indicate LED see table 4.7
Check level sensor
(Indicate LED see table xxxx
Set phase pattern
Check sensors
(Indicate LED see table 4.7
R2 Dispenser
Contents
Initialize all motors
Initialize Probe and syringe
Initialize Sample stirrer
Sample stirrer paddle on
(Continue until rst sw is pushed)
Probe rotate incubator detergent
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate cell position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate incubator position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate rinsing pot position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate) o
Probe rotate detergent 1 position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate detergent 2 position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate R-disk outer position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Probe rotate R-disk inner position
(Check state of bit 6 after rotate)
Sample stirrer move to rinsing pot
(Check state of bit 6 after move)
Sample stirrer move detergent pos
(Check state of bit 6 after move)
Sample stirrer move S-disk outer
(Check state of bit 6 after move)
Sample stirrer move S-disk middle
(Check state of bit 6 after move)
Check sample stirrer sensor
(Indicate LED see table xxxx
Check level sensor
(Indicate LED see table xxxx
Set phase pattern
Check sensors
(Indicate LED see table 4.7
4.8
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Table 4.5
Stirrer / Rinse Off-Line Mode dip switch settings
Dip switch Stirrer / Rinsing
1 2 3 4 5 6 Contents o o o o o o
Initial all motors x o o o o o
Initialize stirrer o x o o o o
Initialize rinsing probe x x o o o o
Stirrer paddle on
(Continue until reset sw is pushed) o o x o o o
Rinse probe vertical excitation
OFF x o o x o y Stirrer rotate rinsing pot position
(Check state of bit 5, 6, after rotate) o x o x o y x x o x o y Stirrer rotate stirrer ½ position
(Check state of bit 5, 6, after rotate) o x x x x x Set phase pattern x x x x x x Check sensors
(Indicate LED see table 4.7
x x x o o o
Rinsing cell y y x o o o
Fill up detergent
Detergent is designated by bit 1, 2
Table 4.6
Photometer Off-Line Mode dip switch settings
Dip Switch Photometer
4 5 6 Contents o o o
Initial reaction disk x o o
Reaction disk rotate
(40 cuvettes) o x o
Reaction disk rotate
(1 cuvette) x x o
Reaction disk rotate
(Repeat 40 cuvettes + 1 cuvette) o x x x x x Check sensors
(Indicate LED see table 4.7
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.9
Mechanics
Table 4.7
Off-Line Mode LED indications
LED 24
LED 23
LED 22
LED 21
LED 20
LED 19
LED 18
LED 17
LED 8
LED 7
LED 6
LED 5
LED 4
LED 3
LED 2
LED 1
LED 16
LED 15
LED 14
LED 13
LED 12
LED 11
LED 10
LED 9
LED 8
LED 7
LED 6
LED 5
LED 4
LED 3
LED 2
LED 1
LED 16
LED 15
LED 14
LED 13
LED 12
LED 11
LED 10
LED 9
Sample Dispenser
Sample disk number read sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF =Flag in sensor)
Sample disk horizontal sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
Sample disk horizontal initial sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
Sample syringe vertical sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
Sample probe shock sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
(not used)
Sample probe horizontal sensor (ON = Flag in sensor, OFF = No flag in sensor)
Sample probe vertical sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
R1 Dispenser
Reaction disk under rotation signal (ON = Busy, OFF = Ready)
Reagent disk horizontal sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
Reagent disk horizontal initial sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
R1 syringe vertical sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
R1 probe shock sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
R1 probe horizontal substitute sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
R1 probe horizontal main sensor (ON = Flag in sensor, OFF = No flag in sensor)
R1 probe vertical sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
R2 Dispenser
Sample disk under rotation signal (ON = Busy, OFF = Ready)
Reagent disk under rotation signal (ON = Busy, OFF = Ready)
Reaction disk under rotation signal (ON = Busy, OFF = ready)
R2 syringe vertical sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
R2 probe shock sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
R2 probe horizontal substitute sensor (ON = Flag in sensor, OFF = No flag in sensor)
R2 probe horizontal main sensor (ON = Flag in sensor, OFF = No flag in sensor)
R2 probe vertical sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
Stirrer / Rinsing
(not used)
(not used)
Reaction disk under rotation signal (ON = Busy, OFF = Ready)
Rinsing vertical lower sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
Rinsing vertical upper sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
Stirrer horizontal substitute sensor (ON = Flag in sensor, OFF = No flag in sensor)
Stirrer horizontal main sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
Stirrer vertical sensor (ON = No flag in sensor, OFF = Flag in sensor)
Photometer
24 Volt fuse FS-6 (ON = OK, OFF = Open)
Stirrer under down signal (ON = Busy, OFF = Ready)
Sample probe under down signal (ON = Busy, OFF = Ready)
R1 probe under down signal (ON = Busy, OFF = Ready)
R2 probe under down signal (ON = Busy, OFF = Ready)
Reaction disk horizontal sensor (ON = Flag in sensor, OFF = No flag in sensor)
Reaction disk horizontal phase sensor (ON = Flag in sensor, OFF = No flag in sensor)
Reaction disk horizontal initial sensor (ON = Flag in sensor, OFF = No flag in sensor)
4.2.6 Sample dispensing
The sample dispensing consists of the sample probe, the probe drive assembly, the syringe pump assembly and the sample tray assembly.
4.10
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
The sample dispenser aspirates the sample from the sample tray assembly, by the programmed quantity, moves and dispenses this into the reaction cuvette. When the sample is diluted inside the cuvette, the sample dispenser aspirates the diluted sample and dispenses it into the next cuvette.
When the instrument is installed with the ISE module the sample dispenser assembly is also used to detect the level height of the sample that is used for the ISE.
Specifications
Sample volume
Sample dispenser
:2 to 40
µ l variable in 1
µ l steps.
Excessive sample volume :10
µ l
To prevent unnecessary dilution of the sample,(sample header).
When the same sample is continuously sampled, the excessive sample volume is performed at the first aspiration exclusively.
Predilution inside the cell :The sample diluted inside the cell is aspirated and dispensed into the next
Sample probe reaction cell.
:Single probe type, electrostatic
Shock sensor capacity level sensor method.
:Used to stop downward movement of the probe when it comes in contact with a foreign object.
Down limit :A function to set a down limit at the bottom of a sample vessel utilizing the shock sensor as sensing guide.
The inner and outer walls of the sample probe are rinsed at the wash pot first. Then the sample probe moves down to the sample aspirate position at the sample tray. The sample probe detects the level of the sample, immerses the tip into the sample by a specified distance, and aspirates the requested volume for that test. The immersion distance of the tip of the probe varies This is dependent on, the volume requested for the sample, the sample vessel type and the level height of the sample. (refer to paragraph 4.2.6.1)
When the sample is aspirated, air is aspirated between water and sample, then the specified sample plus the excessive sample (10
µ l sample header) are aspirated. During consecutive sampling from the same sample, the excessive sample (10
µ l header) remains in the sample probe until all test requirements are aspirated for that sample.
After aspiration, the probe moves down into the cuvette and dispenses the sample into the bottom of the cuvette. At this time, if the dispensed volume is 9
µ l or less, the probe will move up and down with a short stroke after it has discharged the sample into the cuvette.
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.11
Mechanics
After dispensing the probe returns to the position above the wash pot.
When the same sample is continuously analyzed, the probe starts the next aspirate cycle. When the next sample is analyzed, the inner and outer walls of the probe are rinsed inside the wash pot and the sample probe starts its next cycle.
Note: The sample vessel is either a sample cup, primary tube, or micro cup. This is a request that is made when entering information at the patient test menu. When selecting the sample cup or tube remember this must match the type that was selected in the test menu. If the sample cup type is not the same as requested in the patient test menu, the data may be affected by the aspiration of air, etc.
4.2.6.1. Follow-up move-down of the sample probe
The sample probe performs follow-up move-down (FUMD) for the standard cup and the micro cup when a sample is aspirated. The distance by which the liquid level is decreased by aspiration of the sample is determined based on the liquid level position detected and the total aspiration quantity, so the probe is moved down by the corresponding distance insuring that the probe remains in the sample during the aspiration cycle. The total aspiration quantity consists of the specified volume and the excessive sample (sample header).
The FUMD is not performed when primary tubes are used.
The sample probe vertical movement drives a distance of 0.15mm/pulse
Aspiration volumes indicated exclude excessive sample (10
µ l header)
Standard Cup
When sample detection is within range “A”
•
Total aspiration
≤
5
µ l : Down 2 pulses
•
Total aspiration 6
µ l to 10
µ l : Down 6 pulses
•
Total aspiration 11
µ l to 20
µ l : Down 10 pulses
•
Total aspiration 21
µ l to 40
µ l : Down 14 pulses
•
Total aspiration
≥
41
µ l : Down 18 pulses
When sample detection is within range “B”
•
Total aspiration
≤
40
µ l : Down 6 pulses
•
Total aspiration
≥
41
µ l : Down 12 pulses
When sample detection in within range “C”
•
Total aspiration
≤
40
µ l : No additional pulses
•
Total aspiration
≥
41
µ l : Down 6 pulses
4.12
Sample volumes indicated exclude excessive sample (10
µ l header)
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Micro Cup
When sample detection is within range “A”
•
Total aspiration
≤
10
µ l : Down 3 pulses
•
Total aspiration 11
µ l to 20
µ l : Down 8 pulses
•
Total aspiration 21
µ l to 30
µ l : Down 13 pulses
•
Total aspiration 31
µ l to 40
µ l : Down 16 pulses
•
Total aspiration
≥
41
µ l : Down 23 pulses
When sample detection is within range “B”
•
Total aspiration
≤
10
µ l : No additional pulses
•
Total aspiration 11
µ l to 20
µ l : Down 3 pulses
•
Total aspiration 21
µ l to 30
µ l : Down 6 pulses
•
Total aspiration 31
µ l to 40
µ l : Down 10 pulses
•
Total aspiration
≥
41
µ l : Down 15 pulses
When sample detection is within range “C”
•
Total aspiration
≤
20
µ l : No additional pulses
•
Total aspiration
≥
21
µ l : Down 6 pulses
4.2.7 Hardware description Sampler assembly
The sampler assembly is made up of two drive motors, encoder disc, sensor, sensor PCB, a shaft drive assembly, and a sampler head assembly mounted on the shaft of the sampler housing. The two motors are used to drive the assembly vertically up or down and rotationally clockwise or counterclockwise. This is accomplished by drive belts and worm gears and the stepping of the motors driven by software commands.
The sensors detect various positions for the sampler to be in and sends this information to the sampler control systems. The sampler head assembly houses the sample connector nozzle PCB, which supplies the capacitance sensing and shock sensing for the probe assembly.
4.2.8 Sampling module check-out and adjustments
The sampler assembly consist of the Sampler arm assembly (1),the
Sample tray assembly (2), the sample syringe assembly (3), and the Slave
A PCB assembly. Mechanical adjustments are made on the individual assemblies themselves. The electronic drive and control circuitry are contained on the Slave A CPU, Driver A and Driver B pcb’s. Electronic home adjustment is made on the Slave A CPU pcb. For adjustment of the sample sensor and shock sensor refer to Electronics section .
On the Slave A CPU bit switch SW2 is used to enter the Off-Line Mode, to perform checks and mechanical alignments. Return Dip Switch SW2 to the default positions after performing any procedures or checks.
Refer to figure 4.2 for mechanical adjustments of the Sample Arm
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.13
Mechanics
Figure 4.2
Sample arm adjustment
4.14
1. Adjustment of the probe arm
1. Make sure that the sample probe is attached to the probe holder without backlash.
2. Make sure that the probe holder moves smoothly up and down against the chassis and the arm, also that the collision sensor is not in contact with the light shielding plate.
3. Make sure that the vertical movement shaft and the probe are in parallel and that the probe is not tilted while being moved.
4. Adjust the clearance between the probe and the vertical movement shaft to 142
±
0.2mm, then tighten the two locking screws, (C ).
2. Adjusting the sample drive module
1. Adjust attachment of the motor so that the backlash of the gear becomes 0.1 to 0.3 mm in the outer of the sector. Confirm the backlash at four corners of the drive gear.
2. Make sure that the sampler drive module rotates smoothly.
3. Turing on the power and checking the sensor
1. The sample arm drive module and the syringe pumps should already be adjusted in accordance with each assembly drawing or adjustment procedure.
2. Insure system power is on.
3. Select Sensor Check from the off-line mode using the DIP switch
SW2 provided on the slave A CPU assembly.
Set Bit 7 to ON
Depress the RESET switch
Set Bits 1-6 to ON
Set Bit 8 to ON (start operation)
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
The sensor status is indicated by the LEDs.
Check the LED indication table ( 4.7 ) Check Sensor, Sample
Dispenser. insure all sensors are operating correctly.
4. Reset Dip Switch SW2 to the default positions.
4. Setting the Magnetization pattern (electronic home)
1. Set the magnetization pattern in the off-line mode using the DIP switch for saving the magnetization pattern (SW3) provided on the
Slave A PCB Assembly
2. Enter the off-line mode using Dip switch SW2.
Set Bit 7 to ON.
Depress the RESET switch.
Set Bits 2 thru 6 to the ON position.
Change over Bit 8.-Operation is started.
3. Observe LEDs D1 and D2. If either of the LEDs are flashing change the position of Dip switch SW3 Bits 1 and 2 so that the
LED’s D1 and D2 do not flash. When all the LED’s are on, the setting is complete. Dip switch SW3 bit 1 corresponds to LED D1 and bit 2 corresponds to LED D2.
4. Change over SW2 Bit 8. Insure that the sample arm is stopped in the sample position and LEDs D1 and D2 are ON. If LEDs D1 or
D2 are flashing repeat the procedure. If LEDs D1 and D2 are ON the magnetization pattern is set correctly.
5. If necessary change the label on the CPU Box front cover to reflect the correct settings for Dip Switch 3.
6. Reset Dip Switch SW2 to the default positions.
5. Reset operation
1. Set Dip Switch on the Slave A CPU PCB as follows.
Check and see that Bit 7 is set to the on position. (Now, the off- line mode is selected.)
2. Depress the reset switch.
3. Change over Bit 8 . Depress the reset switch, reset operation.
(The reset command specifies that Bit 7 exclusively should be set to the on position, all other bits off).
4. After that, change over Bit 8 to reset the unit.
6. Adjusting the Vertical height position of the probe.
1. Perform the reset operation. (See section 5 )
2. Enter the Off-Line Mode SW2 Bit 7 ON, and depress Reset switch.
3. Move the probe arm to the cuvette.
Set SW2 bit 4 to ON
Change position of SW2 Bit 8. (start operation)
4. The distance from the top face of the cuvette holder to the tip of the probe should be 11.1
±
0.2mm.
5. If height adjustment is necessary, loosen the 2 allen screws securing the arm to the vertical shaft. Loosen the height adjustment
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.15
Mechanics
screw locking nut and adjust the height adjustment screw until the distance between the tip of the probe and the cuvette holder top face is
11.1
±
0.2mm. Tighten the height adjustment screw locking nut.
Tighten allen screws securing arm to vertical shaft.
6. Reset Dip Switch SW2 to default position.
7. After adjusting height perform probe horizontal alignments.
7. Adjusting the Horizontal Arm position at cuvette
1 Insure the Reaction Disk is properly aligned prior to adjusting the sample probe arm.
2. Move the probe to the cuvette position in the off line mode.
SW2 Bit 7 to ON.
Depress Reset switch.
Set SW2 Bit 4 to ON.
Change position of SW2 Bit 8. (start operation)
3. With the probe over the cuvette insure sample probe is centered in the cuvette. If necessary loosen the 2 allen screws securing the arm to the vertical shaft. Rotate the arm until the probe is centered over the cuvette. Tighten the 2 allen screws securing the arm to the vertical shaft.
4. Reset Dip Switch SW2 to the default positions.
Figure 4.3
Sample probe rotational adjustment
4.16
8. Adjusting the rinsing pot position
1. Move the probe arm to the rinsing pot position, in the off-line mode.
2. Set Dip Switch SW2 Bit 7 to ON.
Depress the Reset Switch.
Set SW2 Bit 1 and 4 to ON.
Change position of SW2 bit 8. (start operation)
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
3. If necessary loosen the screws securing the rinse pot and adjust the rinse pot so that the probe is centered in the pot. (allowable error:
±
0.2mm ). Tighten the screws securing the rinse pot.
4. Move the probe to the detergent bottle position.
Set SW2 Bit 1 and 4 to OFF.
Set SW2 Bit 2 and 4 to ON.
Depress the Reset Switch.
Change the position of SW2 Bit 8. (start operation)
5. Insure the probe is near the center of the detergent bottle.
6. Reset Dip Switch SW2 to the default positions.
9. Adjusting the sample disk position
1. Move the probe to the sample disk position in the off-line mode.
(outer position)
Set Dip Switch SW2 Bit 7 to ON.
Depress the Reset switch.
Set SW2 Bit 1, 2, and 4 to ON.
Change position of SW2 Bit 8. (start operation)
2. The probe should be over the center of the cup position. If necessary adjust the Sample Tray collar to align the tray with the probe.
2.1 Reset the arm and remove the sample tray.
2.2 Loosen the 6 screws securing the sample tray collar and adjust the tray as necessary.
2.3 Tighten the 6 screws securing the sample tray collar.
Install the sample tray.
2.4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above to confirm alignment of probe and sample tray.
3. Verify alignment of the sample probe for the center and inner positions. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above. Switch settings for SW2 are as follows;
Center Position SW2 bit 3 and 4 to ON.
Inner Position SW2 bit 1, 3 and 4 to ON.
4. Reset Dip Switch SW2 to the default positions.
10. Sample arm encoder disk adjustment
The probe arm drive assemblies are identical (sample, R1 and R2) except for the encoder disks which control the stopping positions of the arms. If swapping/replacing of arm drive assemblies is required make sure that the correct encoder disk is used. Each encoder disk is identified by letter designations printed on the disk as follows:
SP = Sample Pipette Arm Drive
1 = R1 Arm Drive
2 = R2 Arm Drive
ST = Stirrer Arm Drive
Encoder disks may be removed by removing the two fixing screws. If the encoder disk is removed the encoder disk alignment procedure must be performed.
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.17
Mechanics
Encoder Disk Alignment Procedure
1. Loosen the two fixing screws securing the sample arm encoder disk to the hub.
2. Manually rotate the pulley counterclockwise so that the mechanical stopper is against the stop plate. Refer to figure 4.4
Figure 4.4
Sample arm encoder disk
4.2.9
4.18
3. With the mechanical stopper against the stop plate the flag on the encoder disk should be aligned (in line) with the optical sensor. If not rotate the encoder disk to align flag with optical sensor.
4. With the mechanical stopper against the stop plate and the flag aligned with the optical sensor tighten the encoder disk fixing screws.
5. After alignment of encoder disk perform the Electronic Home
(Magnatization) procedure and the arm rotational alignment procedures.
Sample syringe module
The sample syringe module utilizes a positive displacement syringe for sample volume metering.
The major components of the sample syringe module are the sample syringe body and plunger, stepper motor, solenoid valve, and connector pump pcb. Syringe module control is provided from the
Slave “A” pcb and I/O Driver “B” pcb.
The stepper motor drives the syringe plunger via a flexible metal drive belt. An optical detector is used to sense the “Home Position” and for error detection. A mechanical stop is incorporated to prevent excessive drive in the event of a circuit failure. The solenoid valve directs liquid flow, ie. sample aspiration and dispensing, diluent dispensing and probe rinsing. The pump connector pcb provides connections for the solenoid valve, stepper motor and interface to the
I/O Driver “B” pcb.
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
The sample syringe module is identical to the R1/R2 syringe modules with the exception of the syringe body and plunger, and the home sensor flag.
There are no adjustments required on the syringe module.
4.3 Reagent (R1&R2) dispensing.
The analyzer provides reagent detection, aspiration and dispensing of two separate reagents on the analyzer. The reagents are programmed and volumes set by the System PC into two classes,
Reagent 1 and Reagent 2. The analyzer incorporates several mechanical modules and provides programming commands from the
System PC in performing this task. The R1/R2 reagent dispensing modules (includes reagent sensing), R1/R2 syringe modules and the reagent tray module, together provide this operation.
4.3.1 Reagent dispensing cycle description.
1.
Dispensing the first reagent
Immediately after the sample probe dispenses the sample and moves to the rinse pot, the first reagent probe moves to the reaction cuvette and the reagent is dispensed. The reagent probe has already aspirated its programmed amount of reagent prior to sample dispensing.
When the reagent probe aspirates and dispenses the reagent, it moves in a circular orbit to the position above the reagent bottle for the specified test, and moves down. When the probe sensor detects that the tip of the probe has entered the reagent it stops moving down and aspirates a specified volume of reagent. The reagent probe moves over the reaction cuvette and dispenses the reagent into the cell.
Further more the probe moves to the rinsing pot where the inner and outer surfaces are rinsed with rinsing water.
2. First stirring operation
The reaction cuvette in which the first reagent is dispensed moves
40+1 cells and stops in the stirring position where the cuvette stirrer moves over head and then moves down into the cell and provides mixing. After mixing takes place the assembly is raised and moved to the wash pot where rinsing takes place.
3.
Photometry measurement with first reagent
When stirring of the first regent is finished, measurement takes place.
Photometry is repeatedly performed every time the reaction cell travels through the optical axis of the photometer and until the reaction period is expired.
4. Dispensing and stirring the second reagent
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.19
Mechanics
When a second reagent is selected in the test, it will be dispensed
5min after the first reagent was dispensed. One cycle later the stirring at the cell is performed.
5.
Photometry measurement with second reagent
When stirring of the second reagent is finished, measurement takes place. Photometry is repeatedly performed every time the reaction cell travels through the optical axis of the photometer and until the reaction period is expired.
6.
The 2 reaction cycle analysis
The instrument has the ability to measure 2-reaction rounds testing.
This will incorporate a third and a fourth reagent. The third reagent will be added 12.2 min after the first reagent and the fourth reagent will be added 17.2 min after the first. The maximum measurement period is
21.8 min .
There are no applications at this time and this cycle should only be noted.
The analyzer uses two reagent dispensing systems. There is one, 1 st
/ 3 rd
reagent and one, 2 nd
/ 4 th
reagent. The total reagent and diluent dispensing volumes are under computer software control and are adjustable in 5
µ l steps through a range of 20-200
µ l for reagents 1,2,3 and 4.
A. Inaccuracy is typically less than 2.5
%
at 30
µ l or more.
B. Imprecision is typically less than 1.2
%
at 30
µ l or more.
4.3.1.1 Follow-up move-down of reagent probe
When the reagent probe detects the liquid surface in the reagent bottle the probe will move down a fix distance specific to that bottle type and size. The reagent probe is moved down immediately after detection of the liquid surface. Regardless of the bottle size the reagent probe will always move down 5 pulses (dipping depth).
Reagent probe move-down specifications are indicated below. The reagent probe vertical movement drives a distance of 0.15mm/pulse
Bottle size Move-down pulses
20 ml bottle 12 pulses [ 7 pulses move down + 5 pulses dipping
50 ml bottle 7 pulses
100 ml bottle 5 pulses depth]
[ 2 pulses move down + 5 pulses dipping depth]
[ 0 pulses move down + 5 pulses dipping depth]
4.3.2 R1 & R2 check- out and adjustments.
The reagent dispensing is provided with 2 independent reagent dispenser assemblies. These assemblies perform the task in transporting the reagent probes over the reagent tray, wash pots and
4.20
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
reaction cuvettes. They provide vertical and horizontal movement for the reagent probes, this allows the probes to move into the reagent containers and sense the reagent. The reagent syringe modules, also independent and programmed by the system PC now aspirate the programmed amount of reagent and diluent. The reagent dispensing assemblies then move to the reaction cuvettes, lower and dispense the programmed amount of reagent and diluent into the reaction cuvettes.
On the Slave A CPU bit switch SW5 for R1 and SW8 for R2 is used to enter the Off-Line Mode, to perform checks and mechanical alignments. Return Dip Switch SW5 or SW8 to the default positions after performing any procedures or checks.
Refer to figure 4.5 for mechanical adjustments of the Reagent Arms.
Figure 4.5
Reagent arm adjustment
1. Adjustment of the probe arm
1. Make sure that the reagent probe is attached to the probe holder without backlash.
2. Make sure that the probe holder moves smoothly up and down against the chassis and the arm, also that the collision sensor is not in contact with the light shielding plate.
3. Make sure that the vertical movement shaft and the probe are in parallel and that the probe is not tilted while being moved.
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.21
Mechanics
4. Adjust the clearance between the probe and the vertical movement shaft to 142
±
0.2mm, then tighten the locking screw, (C ).
2. Adjusting the reagent drive module
1. Adjust attachment of the motor so that the backlash of the gear becomes 0.1 to 0.3 mm in the outer of the sector. Confirm the backlash at four corners of the drive gear.
2. Make sure that the reagent drive module rotates smoothly.
3. Turing on the power and checking the sensor
1. The reagent arm drive module and the syringe pumps should already be adjusted in accordance with each assembly drawing or adjustment procedure.
2. Insure system power is on.
3. Select Sensor Check from the off-line mode using the DIP switch
SW5 (R1)or SW8 (R2) provided on the slave A CPU assembly.
Set Bit 7 to ON
Depress the RESET switch
Set Bits 1-6 to ON
Set Bit 8 to ON (start operation)
The sensor status is indicated by the LEDs.
Check the LED indication table ( 4. ) Check Sensor, Reagent
Dispenser. Insure all sensors are operating correctly.
4. Reset Dip Switch SW5 or SW8 to the default positions.
4. Setting the Magnetization pattern (electronic home)
1. Set the magnetization pattern in the off-line mode using the DIP switch for saving the magnetization pattern (SW6 for R1) or (SW9 for R2) provided on the Slave A PCB Assembly
2. Enter the off-line mode using Dip switch SW5 (R1) or SW8 (R2).
Set Bit 7 to ON.
Depress the RESET switch.
Set Bits 2 thru 6 to the ON position.
Change over Bit 8.-Operation is started.
3. Observe LEDs D9 and D10 for R1, and LEDs D17 and D18 for R2.
If either of the LEDs are flashing change the position of Dip switch
SW6 for R1 or SW9 for R2 Bits 1 and 2 so that the LED’s do not flash. When all the LED’s are on, the setting is complete.
Dip switches and LEDs correspond as follows;
R1 SW6 bit 1 LED D9
R1 SW6 bit 2 LED D10
R2 SW9 bit 1 LED D17
R2 SW9 bit 2 LED D18
4. Change over SW5 (R1) or SW8 (R2) Bit 8. Insure that the reagent arm is stopped in the home position and LEDs D9 and D10 or D17
4.22
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
and D18 are ON. If LEDs are flashing repeat the procedure. If
LEDs are ON the magnetization pattern is set correctly.
5. If necessary change the label on the CPU Box front cover to reflect the correct settings for Dip switch SW6 (R1) or SW 9 (R2).
6. Reset Dip Switch SW5 (R1) or SW8 (R2) to the default positions.
5. Reset operation
1. Set Dip Switch SW5 (R1) or SW8 (R2) on the Slave A CPU PCB as follows.
Check and see that Bit 7 is set to the on position. (Now, the off- line mode is selected.)
2. Depress the reset switch.
3. Change over Bit 8 . Depress the reset switch, reset operation.
(The reset command specifies that Bit 7 exclusively should be set to the on position, all other bits off).
4. After that, change over Bit 8 to reset the unit.
6. Adjusting the Vertical position of the probe.
1. Perform the reset operation. (See section 5 )
2. Enter the Off-Line Mode SW5 (R1) or SW8 (R2) Bit 7 ON, and depress Reset switch.
3. Move the R1 probe arm to the cuvette.
Set SW5 bit 4 to ON
Change position of SW5 Bit 8. (Start the operation).
Move the R2 probe arm to the cuvette.
Set SW8 bit 1 and 4 to ON
Change position of SW8 Bit 8. (Start the operation).
4. The distance from the top face of the cuvette holder to the tip of the probe should be 11.1
±
0.2mm.
5. If height adjustment is necessary, loosen the 2 allen screws securing the arm to the vertical shaft. Loosen the height adjustment screw locking nut and adjust the height adjustment screw until the distance between the tip of the probe and the cuvette holder top face is 11.1
±
0.2mm. Tighten the height adjustment screw locking nut.
Tighten allen screws securing arm to vertical shaft.
6. Reset Dip Switch SW5 or SW8 to default position.
7. After adjusting height perform probe horizontal alignments
7. Adjusting the Horizontal Arm position at cuvette
1 Insure the Reaction Disk is properly aligned prior to adjusting the reagent probe arm.
2. Enter the Off-Line Mode SW5 (R1) or SW8 (R2) Bit 7 ON, and depress Reset switch.
3. Move the R1 probe arm to the cuvette.
Set SW5 bit 4 to ON
Change position of SW5 Bit 8. (Start the operation).
Move the R2 probe arm to the cuvette.
Set SW8 bit 1 and 4 to ON
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.23
Mechanics
Change position of SW8 Bit 8. (Start the operation).
4. With the probe over the cuvette insure reagent probe is centered in the cuvette. If necessary loosen the 2 allen screws securing the arm to the vertical shaft. Rotate the arm until the probe is centered over the cuvette. Tighten the 2 allen screws securing the arm to the vertical shaft.
5. Reset Dip Switch SW5 (R1) or SW8 (R2) to the default positions.
Figure 4.6
Reagent probe alignment to cuvette
Align R1 and R2 probes to the center of the cuvette
Figure 4.7
Reagent probe alignments
4.24
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
8. Adjusting the rinsing pot position
1. Move the probe arm to the rinsing pot position, in the off-line mode.
2. Enter the Off-Line Mode SW5 (R1) or SW8 (R2) Bit 7 ON, and depress Reset switch.
3. Move the R1 probe arm to the rinse pot.
Set SW5 bit 2 and 4 to ON
Change position of SW5 Bit 8. (Start the operation).
Move the R2 probe arm to the rinse pot.
Set SW8 bit 1, 2 and 4 to ON
Change position of SW8 Bit 8. (Start the operation).
4. If necessary loosen the screws securing the rinse pot and adjust the rinse pot so that the probe is centered in the pot. (allowable error:
±
0.2mm ). Tighten the screws securing the rinse pot.
5. Reset Dip Switch SW2 to the default positions.
9. Adjusting the reagent tray position
1. Move the probe to the reagent tray position in the off-line mode.
(inner position)
2. Enter the Off-Line Mode SW5 (R1) or SW8 (R2) Bit 7 ON, and depress Reset switch.
Set SW5 Bit 2, 3, and 4 to ON for R1.
Change position of SW5 Bit 8. (Start operation)
Set SW8 Bit 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ON for R2.
Change position of SW8 Bit 8 . (Start operation)
3. The probe should be over the center of the inner reagent bottle position. If necessary adjust the Reagent Tray collar to align the tray with the probe.
3.1 Reset the arm and remove the reagent tray.
3.2 Loosen the 6 screws securing the reagent tray collar and adjust the tray as necessary.
3.3 Tighten the 6 screws securing the reagent tray collar.
Install the reagent tray.
3.4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above to confirm alignment of probe and reagent tray.
4. Verify alignment of the reagent probe for the outer positions.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 above. Switch settings for SW5 (R1) and SW8
(R2) are as follows;
R1 Outer Position SW5 bit 1, 3 and 4 to ON.
R2 Outer Position SW8 bit 2, 3 and 4 to ON.
5. Reset Dip Switch SW5 or SW8 to the default positions.
10. Adjusting the Reagent detergent bottle positions.
1. The detergent bottles have two positions (1 holder) on the R1 side and three positions (2 holders) on the R2 side that require alignment.
2. Move the probe arm to the detergent bottle position, in the off-line mode.
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.25
Mechanics
3. Enter the Off-Line Mode SW5 (R1) or SW8 (R2) Bit 7 ON, and depress Reset switch.
4. Move the R1 probe arm to the detergent 1 bottle.
Set SW5 bit 1, 2 and 4 to ON
Change position of SW5 Bit 8. (Start the operation).
Move the R2 probe arm to the detergent 1 bottle.
Set SW8 bit 3 and 4 to ON
Change position of SW8 Bit 8. (Start the operation).
5. If necessary loosen the screws securing the detergent bottle holder and adjust the holder so that the probe is centered in the bottle.
(allowable error:
±
0.2mm ). Tighten the screws securing the detergent bottle holder.
6 Check alignment of probes at the detergent 2 bottles. Follow steps 3 and 4 above using dip switch settings as follows.
R1 SW5 Bit 3 and 4 to ON
R2 SW8 Bit 1, 3 and 4 to ON
7 Check alignment of the R2 probe at the Incubator Detergent position. Follow steps 3 and 4 above using the dip switch settings as follows.
R2 SW8 Bit 4 to ON
6. Reset Dip Switch SW5 or SW8 to the default positions.
11. Reagent arm encoder disk adjustment
The probe arm drive assemblies are identical (sample, R1 and R2) except for the encoder disks which control the stopping positions of the arms. If swapping/replacing of arm drive assemblies is required make sure that the correct encoder disk is used. Each encoder disk is identified by letter designations printed on the disk as follows:
SP = Sample Pipette Arm Drive
1 = R1 Arm Drive
2 = R2 Arm Drive
ST = Stirrer Arm Drive
Encoder disks may be removed by removing the two fixing screws. If the encoder disk is removed the encoder disk alignment procedure must be performed.
Encoder Disk Alignment Procedure
1. Loosen the two fixing screws securing the reagent arm encoder disk to the hub.
2. Manually rotate the pulley counterclockwise for R1 or clockwise for
R2 so that the mechanical stopper is against the stop plate. Refer to figure 4.8
4.26
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Figure 4.8
Reagent arm encoder disk
3. With the mechanical stopper against the stop plate the flag on the encoder disk should be aligned (in line) with the optical sensor. If not rotate the encoder disk to align flag with optical sensor.
4. With the mechanical stopper against the stop plate and the flag aligned with the optical sensor tighten the encoder disk fixing screws.
5. After alignment of encoder disk perform the Electronic Home
(Magnatization) procedure and the arm rotational alignment procedures.
4.3.3 Reagent syringe module
The reagent syringe module utilizes a positive displacement syringe for reagent volume metering.
The major components of the reagent syringe module are the reagent syringe body and plunger, stepper motor, solenoid valve, and connector pump pcb. Syringe module control is provided from the
Slave “A” pcb and I/O Driver “B” pcb.
The stepper motor drives the syringe plunger via a flexible metal drive belt. An optical detector is used to sense the “Home Position” and for error detection. A mechanical stop is incorporated to prevent excessive drive in the event of a circuit failure. The solenoid valve directs liquid flow, ie. reagent aspiration and dispensing, diluent dispensing and probe rinsing. The pump connector pcb provides connections for the solenoid valve, stepper motor and interface to the
I/O Driver “B” pcb.
The reagent syringe module is identical to the sample syringe module with the exception of the syringe body and plunger, and the home sensor flag.
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.27
Mechanics
The R1 and R2 syringe modules are identical and completely interchangeable.
There are no adjustments required on the syringe module.
4.4 Photometer/Reaction Disk
The reaction disk and photometer assemblies provide the analyzer a method to receive a sample and reagent and measure at a precise time and wavelength .
4.4.1 Analytical cycle description
The photometer adopts the reaction cell direct photometry method.
The reaction disk turns by 40+1 cells in 1 cycle (9 sec). During this period the absorbance of the reaction cells travelling through the optical axis of the photometer is measured if requested at that time through the system programming. During measurement timing, a reaction cell is measured 33 times (33 data points) at the normal reaction time of 9.6 minutes, or 74 points in the 2 point reaction round analysis for 21.8 minutes.
The photometer adopts the after-spectrometry method. The white light emitted from the quartz lamp is focused through a lens. This passes through the reaction cuvette and is focused through a second lens and presents itself through a slit to be separated by the concave defraction grating. The holographic grating separates each wavelength and displays it across the photo detector array assembly. Each waveform is received at the same time by the detector, which the 12 photodiodes, at specific wavelengths are housed. This measurement is amplified and A/D converted so that the absorbance or difference in the absorbance can be obtained. Because the difference in the absorbance between two wavelengths is obtain in two wavelength photometry ,errors such as suspension in the sample, hemolysis, icterus, etc and fluctuations in the power supply can be compensated.
This results in a stable photometric reading.
4.4.2 Mechanical cycle
4.28
The Photometer provides 12 channels (12 wavelengths) to measure at, enabled by the 16-bit A/D converter.
One cycle is 9 seconds and the cell disk rotates clockwise 1 complete rotation in 2 cycles. (18 seconds)
Photometry is performed for 40 + 1 cells in 1 cycle. (9 seconds)
Photometry is performed 144 times (12 wavelengths x 12 readings ) for each cell per cycle. As the reaction disk rotates through the optical axis of the photometer, the cell blank and absorbance of the reaction solutions are measured. From the measurement of the data obtained by the 12 readings, for each wavelength , the lower 8 points are used
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
for the calculations, and the highest 4 points are discarded. The mean value of the lower 8 points is calculated and is the output data, of that cell, at that wavelength, for that data point. This is the value that is sent to the System PC via the main CPU, and is treated as 1 data point of the time course.
For each cell, data acquisition is performed over the entire reaction process, (33 data points) which takes approximately 9.6 minutes. The system parameters determine what wavelength and data points to use for the analysis.
Specifications :
Photometer : Concave holographic grating
Wavelength : 12 types that are fixed
340, 375, 405, 450, 510, 546,
Wavelength precision
Light source
570, 600, 660, 700, 750, 850.
:
±
3 mm
: Halogen lamp (12VDC, 20 W)
The Reaction disk is a single unit assembled with 9 sections. The nine sections house 81 reaction cuvettes. The cuvettes are individually removable and can be replaced as such. The nine sections may be replaced if needed. The reaction disk is removed as a single assembly by moving the screw cap. Care should be taken to avoid damage to the glass cuvettes.
Specifications :
Reaction period : 9.75 min. (usually )
: 21.8 min. (in case of 2- reaction
round analysis )
Number of reaction cuvettes: 81
Reaction disk
Cuvette cell size
: 9 sectors holding 9 cuvettes
: ID 5 x 5 x 32.2 (mm)
Reaction cell optical path : 5 mm length
Cuvette materiel : Pyrex glass
Minimum reaction volume : 180
µ l
Maximum reaction volume : 500
µ l
Cuvette replacement
Cell water filling
: Each cuvette can be replaced
independently
: By setting the analysis
environments, the cell can be
filled with water after analysis
The reaction disk moves clockwise by 40 cells, approximately (4 sec.), stops (approximately 2 sec. ), moves by 1 cell and stops
(approximately 3 sec ) in every cycle which is approximately 9 seconds. The reaction disk repeats this intermittent movement.
The reaction cuvette used in analysis is rinsed by the rinsing unit, and used repeatedly. The reaction cells should be removed as a complete
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.29
Mechanics
assembly. By loosening the retaining cap by hand, the reaction disk can be pulled upward and off of its drive assembly. Pay rigid attention when handling the reaction disk and the reaction cells so that the inner and outer surfaces are not damaged.
4.4.3 Photometer check-out and adjustments
1. Adjusting the photometer drive assembly
1. Adjust the motor attachment position so that the backlash of the gear becomes 0.1 to 0.3 mm in the outer of the drive gear.
2. Turn the drive gear quietly 10 turns by hand, feel the assembly while turning that it drives smoothly. If turning becomes heavy, or catches midway, adjust the motor attachment again or replace the part.
3. Tighten the drive gear. By hand, turn the motor damper quietly 5 or
6 times to make sure that it turns smoothly.
2. Check items before turning on power
1. Rotate the rotor while the reaction disk is removed and make sure no tubing, cables, etc., will interfere with its movement.
2. Make sure that the cuvette holder is correctly secured to the reaction disk. If deformed replace assembly.
3. Make sure that no foreign objects are present in any of the sectors.
Check to see that the photo sensors are not obstructed in any way.
Re-install the disk and tighten by hand. Turn the disk and see that it turns smoothly. Make certain that no part of the disk comes in contact with the walls of the incubator and also has no contact with any of the sensors.
3. Sensor check out , Power on
1. Turn on the power, and select sensor check in the off line mode using Dip Switch SW6 on the Slave B PCB assembly.
Set SW6 Bit 7 to the ON position.
Depress the RESET switch.
Set SW6 Bits 4,5,6, to the ON position.
Set SW6 Bit 8, to the ON position. (start operation)
2. Check the sensor status of the LED’s to verify the sensors are operating properly. Refer to the sensor table. (figure 4.7)
3. Reset SW6 to the default positions.
4. Setting the magnetization pattern in adjusting the Reaction
Module.
a. This is not required to perform.
4.30
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
5. Reset operation
1. Set the Dip switch SW6 on the Slave B CPU PCB as follows.
Check and see that Bit 7 is set to the on position. (Now, the off-line mode is selected.)
2. Depress the reset switch.
3. Change over SW6 Bit 8 . Depress the reset switch, reset operation.
The reset command specifies that Bit 7 exclusively should be set to the on position.)
4. After that, change over Bit 8 to reset the unit.
6. Adjusting the Reaction disk position
CAUTION:
Never perform the reset operation while the alignment pin is inserted into the hole on the plate jig. Otherwise, the alignment pin may become bent or damage to the cuvette holder may occur.
1. Remove the reaction disk (cuvette ring). Loosen the base/motor mounting screws in 3 positions and the photometer mounting nut.
2. Place the reaction disk back onto the mounting shaft. Place the collar and alignment plate jig onto the reaction disk shaft.
3. Perform the reset operation using the DIP Switch SW6 on the
Slave B PCB assembly
4. Insert the alignment pin into the hole on the plate jig. Adjust the photometer so that the tip of the pin is inserted into the hole in the outer edge of the cuvette holder. Move the photometer slowly.
5. Remove the plate jig, collar and reaction disk. Tighten the base motor mounting screws and the Photometer mounting nut
(loosened in step 1).
6. Place the collar, alignment plate jig and the reaction disk onto the shaft. Perform the reset operation. Insert the pin tool into the hole in the alignment plate and insure the tip of the pin tool is still aligned
(inserted into hole in outer edge of reaction disk) with the hole in the outer edge of the reaction disk. Check the alignment at the remaining holes in the alignment plate jig.
7. Remove the pin tool. If the alignment is off repeat this entire procedure.
8. If alignment is good remove the collar and alignment plate jig.
Reinstall the reaction disk.
9. After adjusting reaction disk verify all probe alignments (sample,
R1, R2, stirrer, and rinse probes) and adjust if necessary.
4.5 Stirrers
The stirrer assembly mixes the reaction solution that has been dispensed into the reaction cells.
Specifications :
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.31
Mechanics
Stirrer method
Stirrer timing
First stirring
Second stirring
Configuration
Stirrer paddle turning
Stirrer paddle drying
Rinsing with detergent
: Stirring paddle method, stirring by up
/down and rotational movement.
: Next cycle immediately after the
reagent is dispensed.
: 6.1 sec. after the 1 st
reagent probe
dispenses reagent.
: 11.6 sec. after the 2 nd
reagent probe
dispenses reagent.
: The 1 st
and 2 nd
paddles are driven on
the same arm.
: Each of the 1 st
and the 2 nd
paddles
turn independently.
: After rinsing both paddles spin inside
the vacant wash pots to remove any
excess wash water.
: Rinsing the paddles with detergent 1
and 2 is available.
The 2 nd
reagent probe dispenses the
detergent into the reaction cell and
this rinse is used by the paddles.
4.5.1 Stirring cycle description
When the first or second stirring paddle is requested, the stirring unit spins off excess water from both paddles. The stirrer paddle moves to a position above the reaction cuvette by the stirrer arm assembly. The stirrer unit moves down, then the requested paddle is activated and is exclusively rotated while the arm moves up and down in the cuvette to mix the solution. The stirring function, not only provides stirring by spinning the paddles, but also moves the unit up and down while inside the reaction cuvette. After stirring is completed the stirrer unit moves up and returns to the rinsing pot, then it is rinsed.
4.5.2 Stirrers check-out and adjustments
The stirrer assembly consist of the stirrer unit, which moves the paddles and the Slave B CPU, which controls the unit.
On the Slave B CPU dip switch SW3 is used to enter the Off-Line
Mode, to perform checks and mechanical alignments. Return dip switch SW3 to the default positions after performing any procedures or checks.
1. Power on and sensor check
1. The arm drive module and the syringe module have already been adjusted into specification during assembly. When checking or
4.32
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
making adjustments take note of the positional relationship between the sensor and the light shielding plate.
2. Insure system power is on.
3. Select Sensor Check from the off-line mode using Dip Switch SW3 provided on the Slave B CPU assembly.
Set Bit 7 to ON.
Depress the RESET switch.
Set Bits 1-6 to ON.
Set Bit 8 to ON. (start operation)
The sensor status is indicated by the LED’s
Check the LED Indication Table (4) Check Sensor,
Stirrer/Rinse.
Insure all sensors are operating correctly.
4. Reset dip switch SW3 to the default positions.
2. Setting the magnetization pattern
1. Set the magnetization pattern in the off-line mode using the Dip switch SW1 for saving the magnetization pattern provided on the lave
B PCB assembly.
2. Enter the off-line mode using Dip Switch SW3.
Set Bit 7 to ON.
Depress the Reset switch.
Set Bits 2 thru 6 to the ON position.
Set Bit 8 to ON (start operation)
3. Observe LEDs D1 and D2. If either of the LEDs are flashing change the position of Dip Switch SW1 Bits 1 and 2 so that LEDs D1 and D2 do not flash. When all LEDs are on, the setting is complete. Dip
Switch SW1 bit 1 corresponds to LED D1 and bit 2 corresponds to
LED D2.
4. Change over SW3 Bit 8. while Bit 7 exclusively is set ON (all other bits OFF) Reset operation.
5. Make sure that the stirrer arm is stopped in the rinse position even if Bit 8 is repeatedly changed over and LEDs D1 and D2 are ON.
6 Reset dip switch SW3 to the default position
3. Reset operation
1. Set the Dip switch on the Slave B CPU PCB as follows. Check and see that Bit 7 is set to the on position. (Now, enter the off-line mode.)
2. Depress the reset switch.
3. Change over Bit 8 . Depress the reset switch, reset operation. (The reset command specifies that Bit 7 exclusively should be set to the on position.)
4. After that, change over Bit 8 to reset the unit.
4. Adjusting the vertical position of the stirrer arm.
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.33
Mechanics
4.34
1. Enter the off-line mode SW3 bit 7 to ON, and depress the reset switch.
2. Move the Stirrer arm to the cuvette position.
Set SW3 Bit 1, 2 and 4 to ON.
Change position of SW3 Bit 8 (start operation)
3. With the stirrer at the cuvette position the distance from the top face of the cuvette holder to the tip of the stirrer paddle should be 14.0
±
0.2mm.
4. If adjustment is necessary loosen the two allen screws securing the stirrer arm to the vertical shaft. Loosen the height adjustment screw locking nut and adjust the height adjustment screw until the distance between the paddle and the cuvette holder top is 14.0
±
0.2 mm.
Tighten the height adjustment screw locking nut. Tighten the allen screws securing the arm to the vertical shaft.
5. Reset dip switch SW3 to default positions.
6. After adjusting height perform arm rotational position alignments.
5. Adjusting the arm rotational position
1. Insure the reaction disk is properly aligned prior to adjusting the stirrer arm assembly.
2. Move the stirrer arm to the cuvette position in the off-line mode using SW3 on the Slave B CPU.
SW3 Bit 7 to ON.
Depress the Reset switch.
Set SW3 bit 1, 2 and 4 to ON.
Change position of SW3 Bit 8 (start operation)
3. With the stirrer arm over the cuvette insure that the Stirrer 1 paddle is centered in the cuvette. If necessary loosen the 2 allen screws securing the arm to the vertical shaft. Rotate the arm assembly until the Stirrer 1 paddle is centered in the cuvette. Tighten the 2 allen screws securing the arm to the vertical shaft.
4. After adjusting Stirrer 1 paddle insure that Stirrer 2 paddle is centered in the cuvette. If necessary loosen the 2 phillips screws securing the Stirrer 2 paddle plate to the arm. Adjust the plate until the stirrer 2 paddle is centered in the cuvette. Tighten the 2 phillips screws securing the Stirrer 2 plate to the arm.
5. Reset dip switch SW3 to default positions.
6. Adjusting the stirrer arm rinsing pot position
1. Move the stirrer arm assembly to the rinsing pot position in the offline mode using the Dip Switch SW3 on the Slave B CPU.
2. Set dip switch SW3 bit 7 to ON.
Depress the Reset switch.
Set SW3 bit 1 and 4 to ON.
Change position of SW2 bit 8 (start operation)
3. With the Stirrer arm over the rinse pots insure the paddles are centered in the pots. If necessary loosen the screws securing the rinse pots and adjust pots so that paddles are centered. Tighten screws securing the rinse pots.
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
3. Reset SW3 to default positions.
7. Stirrer arm encoder disk adjustment
The probe arm drive assemblies are identical (sample, R1 and R2) except for the encoder disks which control the stopping positions of the arms. If swapping/replacing of arm drive assemblies is required make sure that the correct encoder disk is used. Each encoder disk is identified by letter designations printed on the disk as follows:
SP = Sample Pipette Arm Drive
1 = R1 Arm Drive
2 = R2 Arm Drive
ST = Stirrer Arm Drive
Encoder disks may be removed by removing the two fixing screws. If the encoder disk is removed the encoder disk alignment procedure must be performed.
Encoder Disk Alignment Procedure
1. Loosen the two fixing screws securing the stirrer arm encoder disk to the hub.
2. Manually rotate the pulley counterclockwise so that the mechanical stopper is against the stop plate. Refer to figure 4.9
Figure 4.9
Stirrer arm encoder disk
3. With the mechanical stopper against the stop plate the flag on the encoder disk should be aligned (in line) with the optical sensor. If not rotate the encoder disk to align flag with optical sensor.
4. With the mechanical stopper against the stop plate and the flag aligned with the optical sensor tighten the encoder disk fixing screws.
5. After alignment of encoder disk perform the Electronic Home
(Magnatization) procedure and the arm rotational alignment procedures.
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.35
Mechanics
4.6 Cuvette wash station
The cuvette wash station is used to aspirate the reaction solution, wash and dry the reaction cuvettes to prepare them for the next analysis cycle. After the analysis, the cell rinsing unit aspirates the reaction solution, rinses the reaction cell with detergent, rinses the reaction cell with water, supplies and aspirates the water for cell blanking and dries the reaction cell.
Each probe is manufactured into 2 sections. One section aspirates a solution and the other section supplies a solution. This provides a means to clean the reaction cuvettes. Six probes are housed in the arm assembly, each probe is spring loaded and spaced precisely which allow the probes to enter individual reaction cells and perform their task. The spring loading allows the arm to reach the bottom of the cuvettes without breaking or causing any damage.
Specifications :
Rinsing probe type : Each single probe is divided into two (2) parts this provides twelve (12 ) separate functions. There are six (6) probes.
1A : Reaction solution aspiration
2A : Detergent 1/Rinse aspiration
3A : Detergent 2/Rinse aspiration
4A : Rinse water aspiration
5A : Rinse water aspiration
6A : Drying probe aspiration
1B : Detergent 1/Rinse discharged
2B : Detergent 2/Rinse discharged
3B : Rinse water discharged
4B : Cell blank water discharged
5B : Cell blank water discharged
6B : Drying probe rinse water
Rinsing with detergent : The rinsing probes 1 and 2 are provided with diluted detergent in which they discharge into the reaction cuvettes to rinse them with.
Cell 1 detergent : New Acid S detergent.
Cell 2 detergent : New Alkali S detergent.
4.6.1 Cuvette washing cycle description
During analysis, the reaction disk moves by 40 cells, stops, then moves by one cell and stops in every 9 sec. cycle. The reaction disk repeats this intermittent operation. The cell rinsing unit rinses the reaction cell once by one down and up operation in the first stop and also twice by two down and up operations in the second stop.(Total 3 times, all in one cycle.)
The rinsing process for one reaction cell is started when the cell rinsing unit performs the second down and up operation. The reaction cell is rinsed with the detergent 1 (3 times), detergent 2 (3 times) and water (9 times), then it is dried twice.
1. Reaction cell 1 moves and stops.
4.36
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
a. 1A reaction solution aspirated, 1B detergent 1 discharged b. 1A detergent 1 is aspirated, 1B detergent 1 discharged.
2. Reaction disk moves 40+1cell, detergent 1 storing and rinse.
3. Reaction disk moves 40 cells and stops.
a. 1A detergent 1 is aspirated, 1B detergent 1 discharged.
4. Reaction disk moves 1 cell and stops.
a. 2A detergent 1 aspirated, 2B detergent 2 discharged.
b. 2A detergent 2 aspirated, 2B detergent 2 discharged.
5. Reaction disk moves 40+1 cell, detergent 2 storing and rinsing.
6. Reaction disk moves 40 cells and stops a. 2A detergent 2 aspirated, 2B detergent discharged.
7. Reaction disk moves 1 cell and stops.
a. 3A detergent 2 aspirated, 3B water discharged.
b. 3A water aspirated, 3B water discharged.
8. Reaction disk moves 40+1 cell, water storing and rinsing.
9. Reaction disk moves 40 cells and stops.
a. 3A water aspirated, 3B water discharged.
10. Reaction disk moves 1 cell and stops.
a. 4A water aspirated, 4B water discharged.
b. 4A water aspirated, 4B water discharged.
11. Reaction disk moves 40+1 cell,1 st
cell blank measured.
12. Reaction disk moves 40 cells and stops.
a. 4A water aspirated, 4B water discharged.
13. Reaction disk moves 1 cell and stops.
a. 5A water aspirated,5B water discharged.
b. 5A water aspirated,5B water discharged.
14. Reaction disk moves 40+1 cell, 2 nd
cell blank measured.
15. Reaction disk moves 40 cells and stops.
a. 5A water aspirated, 5B water discharged.
16. Reaction disk moves 1 cell and stops.
a. 6A water aspirated.
17. Reaction disk moves 40+1 cell and stops.
18. Reaction disk moves 1 cell and stops.
a. 6A dewaters cuvette.
4.6.2 Cuvette wash station check -out and adjustment
The cuvette wash station module is really made up of three modules.
The rinsing module houses the aspiration and discharge probe assemblies, six combination probes in all. This module provides vertical and rotational movement.
The Drain pot assemblies, these provide a controlled vacuum source to aspirate solution out of the reaction cuvettes to a drain source.
The Detergent dilution assembly provides a source to draw detergent
1, detergent 2, or degassed water and discharge this into the cuvettes for rinsing.
The Slave B PCB controls these assemblies.
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.37
Mechanics
The Slave B PCB controls both the rinsing module and the stirrer module. When turning on power, perform the initial adjustment of the stirrer module first if this has not been done.
1. Adjusting cuvette vertical drive
1. Move the vertical shaft up and down before turning on the power.
This also can be done after power is on if you are in the off-line mode and magnetization is turned off. Confirm that it moves smoothly.
To disable magnetization (motor power) use the dip switch SW3 on the Slave B CPU.
Set Dip Switch SW3 Bit 7 to ON.
Depress the Reset switch.
Set SW3 bit 3 to ON.
Change position of SW3 bit 8 (start operation)
Set SW3 to default positions when procedure is completed.
2. Adjust the module so the top face of the light shielding plate becomes flush with the top face of the upper photo sensor when the shaft is moved up until it reaches the upper stop position. Upper mechanical stop is set to 23.4 mm. Adjust the module also so the bottom of the light shielding plate becomes flush with the bottom of the lower photo sensor when the shaft is moved down and reaches the lower stop position. Lower mechanical stop is set to 23.3 mm.
2. Adjusting the rinse probe
1. Move the rinsing probe up and down by hand, make sure that they move smoothly.
2. Make sure that the rinsing probes ( 6 total ) spring back to their upper limits when pulled down by hand and released.
3. Make sure they are all straight and enter the reaction cuvettes without striking the sides, this excludes the drying tip which should slide smoothly down the cuvette wall.
3. Turning on the power and checking the sensors
1. This procedure places the instrument in the off line mode to provide sensor checking.
2. Turn on the power. Locate the Dip Switch SW3 on the Slave B
PCB.
Set Bit 7 to the ON position.
Depress the reset switch.
Set Bits 1 to 6 to the ON positions.
Set Bit 8 to the ON position.
3. The sensor status is displayed by the LED indication. Check the
LED indication table (4) Check Sensor Stirrer / Rinse. Insure all sensors are operation correctly.
4. Reset dip switch SW3 to default position.
4.38
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
4. Adjusting the backlash of the drive gear
Move the shaft up and down while the motor is energized and adjust the motor mounting screws if necessary so that the play between the gears becomes no more than 0.1 to 0.3 mm. Make sure that grease is applied to the engaged portions of the gear.
5. Vertical drive adjustment
1. Loosen the set screw to the collar assembly, move the collar up and down and adjust and fix the collar so that the distance between the tip of the rinsing probe and the top face of the cuvette holder is
6.5
±
0.2 mm.
6. Confirming the backlash of the drying tip
1. Check the backlash of the Teflon drying tip and that it is within the set range of 0.2 to 0.5mm. If not the dispersion of the cuvette cannot be handled.
7. Plane position adjustment
Place the instrument in the off line mode to make these adjustments.
Before performing this procedure check the reaction disk and verify that it is in its proper alignment.
1. This procedure places the instrument in the off line mode and removes power to the motor.
2. Turn on the power. Locate the Dip switch SW3 on the Slave B PCB.
Set Bit 7 to the ON position.
Depress the reset switch.
Set Bits 1 to 6 to the ON positions.
Set Bit 8 to the ON position.
The sensor status is displayed by the LED indication. Check the LED table to verify proper sensor status.
3. Set the movement in the vertical direction, and adjust the plane position and the rotation position.
4. Loosen the screw, adjust six probes so that all of them can be inserted without touching the cuvette, then tighten the screw again.
Instrumentation Laboratory
4.39
ILab600 Service Manual
5 Fluidics
5.1
Pure Water supply
The pure water system provides water for washing the outside of the probes and stirrer paddles at their wash stations. It is also a supply source to the degassed water system. See Fig.5.1
5.1.1
Pure water description
The main task of the pure water system is to supply water to the analyzer at a constant pressure adjusted to 90 +/- 5 Kpa. This utilizes a feed tank, a water level sensor, solenoid valves, a distribution manifold and pressure pump. The distribution manifold routes the supplied water to the degasser water system and to the wash pots, it also supplies the ISE module. The system provides draining and refilling of the feed tank for maintenance routines.
The water enters the analyzer through a general water filter located out side the instrument. Through the inlet port the pure water flow is controlled by SV 71. From SV 71 the water enters the feed tank through the Float Switch assembly. The feed tank provides the system with a constant supply of pure water and a place to detect water levels needed for general operation of the analyzer. The Float Switch incorporates three floats. They detect the various levels of pure water in the tank and alert messages to the System PC. When the top and middle floats are in the up position SV 71 is closed which stops filling the pure water tank.
When the top and middle floats are in the down position SV 71 is opened which allows water to fill the pure water tank. When all three floats are in the down position the error “Pure Water Tank
Abnormal Level” is generated.
The pure water leaves the tank assembly via a snap connector at the bottom which supplies a pump . The pump assembly generates a constant pressure to the pure/degassed water manifold for distribution throughout the analyzer. See Table
5.1
5.1
Instrumentation Laboratory
Fluidics
Table 5.1
Manifold connections
ISE Module
Feed tank
Pressure switch
Pressure gauge
D e g a s s e r
Solenoid valve 71 (SV71)
Solenoid valve 72 (SV72)
Description
Used for probe washing.
Feed back loop to maintain constant pressure while.
conserving its water requirements.
Alerts the system if the water press becomes too low.
Pressure gauge displays the water pressure at the manifold assy. With the manifold regulating valve, (Red
Handle) this should be adjusted to 90±5 kPa.
Degasser provides degassed water back to the manifold for distribution with in the Degassed water system. (Explained later)
Allows pure water to fill the feed tank when requested by the feed tank level sensor switch.
Allows the analyzer to drain the feed tank assy for routine maintenance programs.
Pure water is routed to the Valve Pure Water Solenoid Manifold assy and is distributed to the systems probe and stirrer rinse pots which wash the outside of those assemblies. See Table 5.2
Table 5.2
Manifold connections
Solenoid valve 21 (SV21)
Description
Controls water to the sample rinse pot.
Solenoid valve 22 (SV22)
Solenoid valve 23 (SV23)
Solenoid valve 24 (SV24)
Solenoid valve 25 (SV25)
Controls water to the R1 rinse pot.
Controls water to the R2 rinse pot.
Controls water to stirrer 1&2 rinse pots.
Controls water to the sample stirrer rinse pot.
5.2
Degassed water supply
Degassed water is produced in the analyzer to provide the system with a source of gas free water which does not interfere with the photometric reading. This is needed to clean the cuvettes, rinse the sample and reagent probes internally, provide the system with a diluent source and a means to incubate the cuvettes while measuring through them. See fig.5.2
5.2
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 5.1
POT 2
PRIMARY
DRAIN
NO
(AIR)
G4
G4
L-560
L-560
A2
L-160
A2
L-220
A2
L-90
SV44
NC SV42
C
A2
L-220
POT 1
SECONDARY
DRAIN
SV43
C2
L-400 C2
L-300 A2
L-790
G4
L-1100
G4
L-1100
L-20
L-20
D2
D2
SV86
L-47
SV83
G4
L-20 D2
L-120 D3
DRAIN
OUTLET
F1 L-260
B2 L-280
C2 L-640
D4 L-350
V.PSW
NO
-0.028MPa
OUTLET INLET
PUMP
A1
L-1100
L-1210
L-1165
L-1170
L-1190
L-1270
E1 L-800
E1 L-800
SV85
G4 L-47
SV82
SV81
A2
L-170
E1
L-1460 D1
L-2700
SV32 SV31 SV33 SV34
A1
L-1800
VALVE DGS WATER
A3
L-40
4
3
2
1
6
5
G4 L-185
SV84
G4
L-150
B2
L-240
SV51
B2
L-115
COOLER UNIT
D.PSW
NO
-0.04 Mpa
-300mmHg
SV61
VACUUM
CHAMBER
PUMP
VACUUM
PUMP
1 2 3 4 5 6
A1
A2 POLYURETHANE TUBE
A3
B1
B2 SILICONE TUBE
B3
C1
C2
TETRON BRAID HOSE
C3
C4
LAMP
A2
L-470
HEATER
B2
L-600
L-2740
L-20
L-90
E1
D2
D2
PORT
ILab600 Service Manual
8
3
13
3.5
D
4
6
13.5
15
18
26
‚„
2.5
4
5
1
8
1.5
8
9
12
19
P/N
016-46011
016-46012
016-46013
016-31350-07
016-31350-21
016-31351-35
018-31505
018-31509
018-31510
018-31512
D1
D2
D3
D4
VINYL TUBE,R3603
E1 POALON TUBE
F1 POLY VINYL CHLORIDE TUBE
G1
G2
TEFLON TUBE
G3
G4
D
1/8
1/4
7/32
5/16
4
20
1.8
2.3
3
2
‚„
1/16
1/8
3/32
3/16
2
15
1
1.5
2
1
P/N
016-31401
016-31404
016-31426
016-31428
241-90023
016-31373
016-37605
016-37607
016-37503
016-37502
R2 R1 S STR1 STR2
R2 R1
REAGENT DISK
SAMPLE
STIRRER
ACCESSORY
G1
L-500
G1
L-500
A2 L-400
THERMOSTAT
A3
L-650
A3
L-650
D1
L-1000
ACCESSORY
ISE
PW PSW
NC
-27.5KPa
C4
L-95
90KPa
A3
L-560
C3
L-325
PW.LSW
B2
L-560
B1 L-1900
B3
L-10
B3
L-10
D1
L-1620 D1
L-1450 D1
L-1290 D1
L-650 D1
L-650
DRAIN TUB
D1
L-1300
ACCESSORY
G2
L-800
G2
L-420
G1
L-1200
SV
25
ACCESSORY
R2 R1 S
SV13 SV12 SV11
A3 L-510
8.3 L
6.4 L
4.4 L
(error)
B1 L-1450
A1 L-235
A1 L-290
A1 L-330
PURE
WATER
INLET
SV71
AB31
BS
PT 1/4
SV72
AB31
BS
PT 1/4
FILTER
PUMP
5.3
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 5.2
POT 2
G4
G4
L-560
L-560
A2
L-160
A2
L-220
A2
L-220
POT 1
NO
(AIR)
A2
L-90
SV44
NC SV42
C
SV43
C2
L-400 C2
L-300 A2
L-790
G4
L-1100
G4
L-1100
L-20
L-20
D2
D2
SV86
L-47 G4
SV83
L-20 D2
L-120 D3
F1 L-260
B2 L-280
A1
L-1100
L-1210
L-1165
L-1170
L-1190
L-1270
E1 L-800
E1 L-800
SV85
G4 L-47
SV82
SV81
4
3
2
1
6
5
G4 L-185
SV84
G4
L-150
A2
L-170
E1
L-1460 D1
L-2700
SV32 SV31 SV33 SV34
A1
L-1800
VALVE DGS WATER
A3
L-40
DRAIN
OUTLET
C2 L-640
D4 L-350
V.PSW
NO
-0.028MPa
OUTLET INLET
Instrumentation Laboratory
PUMP
SV51
B2
L-240
B2
L-115
COOLER UNIT
D.PSW
NO
-0.04 Mpa
-300mmHg
SV61
VACUUM
CHAMBER
PUMP
VACUUM
PUMP
1 2 3 4 5 6
A1
A2 POLYURETHANE TUBE
A3
B1
B2 SILICONE TUBE
B3
C1
C2
C3
C4
TETRON BRAID HOSE
LAMP
A2
L-470
HEATER
B2
L-600
L-2740
L-20
L-90
E1
D2
D2
PORT
D
8
3
4
6
13
3.5
13.5
15
18
26
‚„
2.5
4
5
1
8
1.5
8
9
12
19
P/N
016-46011
016-46012
016-46013
016-31350-07
016-31350-21
016-31351-35
018-31505
018-31509
018-31510
018-31512
D1
D2
D3
D4
VINYL TUBE,R3603
E1 POALON TUBE
F1 POLY VINYL CHLORIDE TUBE
G1
G2
G3
G4
TEFLON TUBE
Figure 2.
D
1/8
1/4
7/32
5/16
4
20
1.8
2.3
3
2
‚„
1/16
1/8
3/32
3/16
2
15
1
1.5
2
1
P/N
016-31401
016-31404
016-31426
016-31428
241-90023
016-31373
016-37605
016-37607
016-37503
016-37502
Fluidics
R2 R1 S STR1 STR2
R2 R1
REAGENT DISK SAMPLE
STIRRER
ACCESSORY
G1
L-500
G1
L-500
A2 L-400
THERMOSTAT
A3
L-650
A3
L-650
D1
L-1000
ACCESSORY
ISE
PW PSW
NC
-27.5KPa
C4
L-95
90KPa
A3
L-560
B1 L-1900
B3
L-10
B3
L-10
D1
L-1620 D1
L-1450 D1
L-1290 D1
L-650 D1
L-650
DRAIN TUB
D1
L-1300
ACCESSORY
G2
L-800
G2
L-420
G1
L-1200
SV
25
ACCESSORY
R2 R1 S
SV13 SV12 SV11
PW.LSW
B2
L-560
PUMP
A3 L-510
8.3 L
6.4 L
4.4 L
(error)
B1 L-1450
A1 L-235
A1 L-290
A1 L-330
PURE
WATER
INLET
FILTER
SV71
AB31
BS
PT 1/4
SV72
AB31
BS
PT 1/4
Ilab 600
Degassed water flow diagram
5.4
ILab600 Service Manual
5.2.1
Degassed Water fluidic description
Pure water is supplied and passes through the Degasser unit.
This has a membrane inside which the water passes by on one side and on the other side is a vacuum. The membrane has the ability to let gas pass through but not a liquid, in turn this draws the gas out of solution and leaves the water gas free.
The degassed water leaves the Degasser and is routed to the pure water/ degassed water manifold. The manifold routes the degassed water to several selected areas of the analyzer. See table 5.3
Table 5.3.
Manifold connections Description
Syringe Pump assy Supplies water to the syringe pump assy.
Solenoid valve (SV11)
Solenoid valve (SV12)
Solenoid valve (SV13)
Valve degass water manifold
Controls the flow to the sample syringe.
Controls the flow to the R1syringe.
Controls the flow to the R2 syringe.
Supplies water to Solenoid valves
SV31,SV32,SV33,SV34.
Solenoid valve (SV31)
Finger valve /(SV31)
Solenoid valve (SV32)
Controls the flow to the detergent module and probes 1-2.
Adjust the flow to Probes 1, 2.
Controls the flow back to the module and probes
3-5.
Adjust the flow to Probes 3,4 and 5.
Finger valve /(SV32)
Solenoid valve (SV33)
Solenoid valve (SV 34)
Solenoid valve (SV51)
Controls the flow to probe 6 the drier.
Controls the flow to the incubator bath pump.
Controls the degas system to drain.
Degassed water is routed from the pure water/degassed water manifold to the degassed water valve assy. The degassed water valve assy consists of solenoid valves SV31-34.
SV31-33 control water flow to the wash probes. SV31 controls water flow to wash probes 1 and 2. SV32 controls water flow to wash probes 3, 4 and 5. The flow from SV31 and SV32 is adjustable. Finger valves mounted on top of these valves are used to increase or decrease the volume of water delivered to the cuvettes during the wash routine. Also a vent line is routed to STR
Pot 1 to relieve back pressure.
SV33 feeds water to wash probe 6 (dryer tip). Flow from SV33 is fixed by the hardware and is not adjustable.
Instrumentation Laboratory
5.5
Fluidics
SV34 supplies degassed water to the incubator/reservoir assy.
As DGS water enters the pump it is circulated out of the pump and into the cooler unit. This assists in maintaining constant temperature in warm environmental conditions. The DGS water leaves the cooler unit and is routed to the heater assy. Here it is heated and maintains as requested a constant temperature. The incubator bath circulates the water around the cuvettes and the
Quartz lamp assy. SV51 is used to drain the water bath assy and degassed water system.
Degassed water is also routed to the syringe pumps via SV11-13 for internal rinsing and as a means of providing a diluent.
5.3
Vacuum fluidics
The main task of the vacuum system is to provide a source of vacuum for the Degasser assembly, draw in detergent 1-2 to assist in cleaning of the cuvettes and to evacuate the cuvettes in their wash cycles.
5.3.1
Vacuum fluidic description
The vacuum system is comprised with two pumps. The first pump pulls a vacuum on the Degasser assy and the second pump pulls a vacuum on the main vacuum tank. The vacuum generated is used by demand and is cycled by the system for degassing and is vented to the drain outlet.
The second pump supplies a source for the Drain Pot assy and the Detergent Assy .The main vacuum tank is pulled down in vacuum by the main vacuum pump. The vacuum gauge should indicate -0.075 Map or less. A higher reading may indicate a leak in the system.
The tank assy also incorporates a float switch which provides overflow protection. The vacuum sensor transducer supplies error detection to the System PC.
The main source is routed to the Drain Pot assembly.
The Drain Pot assy provides the analyzer with the ability to evacuate the cuvettes during its cleaning cycle and introduce a vacuum pull for detergent 1 and 2 into the Detergent Dilution chamber. See table 5.4
5.6
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 5.3
A1
L-1100
L-1210
L-1165
L-1170
L-1190
L-1270
E1 L-800
E1 L-800
SV85
G4 L-47
SV82
SV81
G4 L-185
SV84
G4
L-150
4
3
2
1
6
5
POT 2
PRIMARY
DRAIN
NO
(AIR)
G4
G4
L-560
L-560
A2
L-160
A2
L-220
A2
L-90
SV44
NC SV42
C
A2
L-220
POT 1
SECONDARY
DRAIN
SV43
C2
L-400 C2
L-300 A2
L-790
G4
L-1100
G4
L-1100
L-20 D2
L-20 D2
SV86
L-47
SV83
G4
L-20
L-120
D2
D3
F1 L-260
B2 L-280
A2
L-170
SV32
E1
L-1460 D1
SV31
L-2700
SV33 SV34
A1
L-1800
VALVE DGS WATER
A3
L-40
DRAIN
OUTLET
C2 L-640
D4 L-350
V.PSW
NO
-0.028MPa
OUTLET INLET
PUMP
COOLER UNIT
D.PSW
NO
-0.04 Mpa
-300mmHg
SV51
B2
L-240
B2
L-115
PUMP
1 2 3 4 5 6
A1
A2 POLYURETHANE TUBE
A3
B1
B2 SILICONE TUBE
B3
C3
C4
TETRON BRAID HOSE
LAMP
A2
L-470
A2 L-400
THERMOSTAT
HEATER
B2
L-600
L-2740
L-20
L-90
E1
D2
D2
PORT
A3
L-650
A3
L-650
D1
L-1000
ACCESSORY
ISE
PW PSW
NC
-27.5KPa
C4
L-95
90KPa
A3
L-560
C3
L-325
B2
L-560
8
3
13
3.5
D
4
6
18
26
‚„
2.5
4
5
1
8
1.5
8
9
12
19
P/N
016-46011
016-46012
016-46013
016-31350-07
016-31350-21
016-31351-35
018-31505
018-31509
018-31510
018-31512
D1
D2
D3
D4
VINYL TUBE,R3603
E1 POALON TUBE
F1 POLY VINYL CHLORIDE TUBE
G2
G3
G4
TEFLON TUBE
R2 R1 S STR1 STR2
R2 R1
REAGENT DISK
ILab600 Service Manual
Figure 3.
D
1/8
1/4
7/32
5/16
4
20
1.8
2.3
3
2
‚„
1/16
1/8
3/32
3/16
2
15
1
1.5
2
1
P/N
016-31401
016-31404
016-31426
016-31428
241-90023
016-31373
016-37605
016-37607
016-37503
016-37502
SAMPLE
STIRRER
G1
L-500
G1
L-500
B1 L-1900
B3
L-10
B3
L-10
D1
L-1620 D1
L-1450 D1
L-1290 D1
L-650 D1
L-650
DRAIN TUB
D1
L-1300
ACCESSORY
G2
L-800
G2
L-420
G1
L-1200
SV23
(R2)
SV22
(R1)
SV21
(S)
SV24
(STR)
SV
25
ACCESSORY
R2 R1 S
SV13 SV12 SV11
PW.LSW
A3 L-510
8.3 L
6.4 L
4.4 L
(error)
B1 L-1450
A1 L-235
A1 L-290
PURE
WATER
INLET
A1 L-330
SV71
AB31
BS
PT 1/4
SV72
AB31
BS
PT 1/4
FILTER
PUMP
SV61
ILab 600
Vacuum flow diagram
5.7
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 5.4
G4
G4
L-560
L-560
A2
L-160
A2
L-220
POT 2
PRIMARY
DRAIN
NO
(AIR)
A2
L-90
SV44
NC SV42
C
A2
L-220
POT 1
SECONDARY
DRAIN
SV43
C2
L-400 C2
L-300 A2
L-790
G4
L-1100
G4
L-1100
L-20
L-20
SV86
L-47
SV83
G4
D2
D2
L-20
L-120
D2
D3
A1
L-1100
L-1210
L-1165
L-1170
L-1190
L-1270
E1 L-800
E1 L-800
SV85
G4 L-47
SV82
SV81
4
3
2
1
6
5
G4 L-185
SV84
G4
L-150
F1 L-260
B2 L-280
A2
L-170
E1
L-1460 D1
L-2700
SV32 SV31 SV33 SV34
A1
L-1800
VALVE DGS WATER
A3
L-40
DRAIN
OUTLET
C2 L-640
D4 L-350
V.PSW
NO
-0.028MPa
OUTLET INLET
PUMP
Instrumentation Laboratory
B2
L-240
SV51
B2
L-115
COOLER UNIT
D.PSW
NO
-0.04 Mpa
-300mmHg
SV61
VACUUM
CHAMBER
PUMP
VACUUM
PUMP
1 2 3 4 5 6
A1
A2 POLYURETHANE TUBE
A3
B1
B2 SILICONE TUBE
B3
C1
C2
C3
C4
TETRON BRAID HOSE
LAMP
A2
L-470
HEATER
B2
L-600
L-2740
L-20
L-90
E1
D2
D2
PORT
D
13
3.5
13.5
15
8
3
4
6
18
26
‚„
2.5
4
5
1
8
1.5
8
9
12
19
P/N
016-46011
016-46012
016-46013
016-31350-07
016-31350-21
016-31351-35
018-31505
018-31509
018-31510
018-31512
D1
D2
D3
D4
VINYL TUBE,R3603
E1 POALON TUBE
F1 POLY VINYL CHLORIDE TUBE
G1
G2
G3
G4
TEFLON TUBE
Figure 4.
Fluidics
D
1/8
1/4
7/32
5/16
4
20
1.8
2.3
3
2
‚„
1/16
1/8
3/32
3/16
2
15
1
1.5
2
1
P/N
016-31401
016-31404
016-31426
016-31428
241-90023
016-31373
016-37605
016-37607
016-37503
016-37502
R2 R1 S STR1 STR2
R2 R1
REAGENT DISK SAMPLE
STIRRER
ACCESSORY
G1
L-500
G1
L-500
A2 L-400
THERMOSTAT
B1 L-1900
A3
L-650
A3
L-650
D1
L-1000
ACCESSORY
ISE
PW PSW
NC
-27.5KPa
C4
L-95
90KPa
A3
L-560
C3
L-325
PW.LSW
B3
L-10
B3
L-10
D1
L-1620 D1
L-1450 D1
L-1290 D1
L-650 D1
L-650
DRAIN TUB
D1
L-1300
ACCESSORY
G2
L-800
G2
L-420
G1
L-1200
SV
25
ACCESSORY
R2 R1 S
SV13 SV12 SV11
B2
L-560
PUMP
A3 L-510
8.3 L
6.4 L
4.4 L
(error)
B1 L-1450
A1 L-235
A1 L-290
A1 L-330
PURE
WATER
INLET
FILTER
SV71
AB31
BS
PT 1/4
SV72
AB31
BS
PT 1/4
ILab 600
Incubabor flow diagram
5.8
ILab600 Service Manual
Table 5.4 .
Manifold connections
Degasser
Degasser Manifold
Degasser Pressure switch
Solenoid valve 61 (SV 61)
Vacuum gauge
Vacuum tank pressure switch Alerts the system PC if the vacuum falls out of specifications -0.028Mpa.
Vacuum tank assy
Float switch
Supplies the system with a constant vacuum source.
Alerts the system PC if the vacuum tank is filling up with waste.
Solenoid valve 42
Solenoid valve 43
Controls vacuum to the primary/secondary drain and wash probes.
Controls venting and waste drain to Pot 2 Primary drain assy.
Solenoid valve 44
Description
Used to draw gas out of water by membrane technology.
Provides a connection from the pump to SV61,D.PWS
and the degasser.
Trigger alarm if vacuum is abnormal
Vents vacuum pump
Displays the vacuum in atmospheres at the vacuum tank assy.
Solenoid valve 81
Solenoid valve 82
Solenoid valve 83
Solenoid valve 84
Solenoid valve 85
Solenoid valve 86
Solenoid valve 31
Wash probes
Controls venting and waste drain to Pot 1 Secondary drain assy.
Sets detergent volume
Open fluidic path to detergent
Prime detergent 1
Set detergent volume
Open fluidic path to detergent
Prime detergent 2
Controls cycles degassed water to mix with detergent for the wash probes.
Half of the wash probe assys provide vacuum draw to evacuate the cells.
5.4
Incubator Bath fluidics
The incubator Bath assembly provides the analyzer a means to heat reaction cuvettes to a constant temperature and allows the photometer to read the test through the degassed water
Instrumentation Laboratory
5.9
Fluidics
circulating around them. In this system a cooling unit has been installed to provide greater temperature stability in warmer environmental conditions. See Fig. 5.4
5.4.1
Incubator bath description
Sv34 controls the level of water in the bath assy, which is sensed by the bath level detector. As DGS water enters the pump it is pressurised and circulated into the cooler unit. The degassed water leaves the cooler unit and is routed to the heater assy. Here it is heated and maintains as requested a constant temperature.
The water exits the heater and is pumped to the cuvette bath housing and the quartz lamp housing. In this area the water circulates around the cuvettes for incubation and the lamp for cooling. The bath level detector is located here and maintains the bath water to a constant level. When in contact with the water
SV34 is closed, when not in contact with the water, the valve opens and adds water. A drain on the water bath allows the circulating pump to draw out the bath water. This is returned to the pump and the cycle starts over again. SV51 is used to drain the
Degassed water system. See table 5.5
Table 5.5
Incubator connections
Solenoid valve 34 (SV34)
Pump
Cooler unit
Heater/Thermostat
Incubator Bath
Lamp housing
Solenoid valve 51 (SV51)
Bath level sensor
Description
Control the feed of water to the bath assy.
Provides circulation.
Cools Bath and aids in thermal regulation.
Heats and regulates bath water.
Provides circulation of bath water around cuvettes for incubation.
Cools the lamp, cancels lamp housing from affecting incubation.
Drain incubator system
Detects the level on bath water and controls SV34.
5.5
Check-out and adjustments
The following section will outline check outs and adjustment of the
ILab 600 fluidic and vacuum systems.
5.10
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Figure 5.5
5.5.1
Adjustment of Pure water pressure
Prior to adjusting the Pure Water Pressure the system should be in the Ready or Analyzing status. Insure the pump is operating properly and the pump fluid path has no air bubbles.
While observing the pressure gauge located on the manifold turn the regulating valve (red handle) to set the pressure to 90 ± 5 Kpa.
5.5.2
Adjustment of the cuvette washing flow rate
Select “ Maintance “ and “Rinse cells “ or request a water blank to perform the next series of adjustments. After adjustments and checks have been made to the pure water system and are completed, perform the analysis operation by selecting “
Maintenance” at the system PC.
Instrumentation Laboratory
5.11
Fluidics
Fig. 5.6
Fig 5.7
5.12
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Fig. 5.8
Fig 5.9
1. Adjusting the Flow rate for probes 1 and 2 is accomplished at
SV 31. Locate SV31, sitting on top of the valve you will find the finger valve that controls the volume of water that is dispensed out of the probes and into the cuvettes.
Instrumentation Laboratory
2. Observe the levels in the cuvettes. If adjustment is required , level to low or overflowing, loosen the locking nut to the valve.
3. Adjust the finger valve so the level is approximately 2 mm below the top of each cuvette and not overflowing. When
5.13
Fluidics
Fig 5.10
adjustment is complete, tighten down the locking nut.
4. Check to see flow stops as the cuvettes move and no dripping is seen from the tips of the probes. If dripping is observed then
SV31 may need cleaning or replacement.
5. Adjusting the Flow rate for probes 3 and 5 is accomplished at
SV 32.
6. Locate SV32, sitting on top of the valve is the finger valve that controls the volume of water that is dispensed out of the probes into the cuvettes there.
7. Observe the levels in the cuvettes. If adjustment is required, ie level too low or overflowing, loosen the locking nut to the valve.
5.14
8. Adjustment the finger valve so the level is approx 2 mm below the top of each cuvette and not over flowing. When adjustment is complete, tighten down the locking nut.
9. Check to see flow stops as the probes exit the cuvettes and that no dripping is seen from the tips of the probes. If so then
SV32 may need cleaning or replacement.
10. The volume of water to probe 6 is provided by SV33. This is hardware determined and no adjustment is required. However, make sure the water fills the cuvette and does not overflow. A stuck or leaking valve may cause this. If so Sv33 may need cleaning or replacement.
5.5.3
Check-out of detergent dilution module
This procedure is intended to verify that the dilution manifold will draw in detergent 1 and detergent 2.
1. For testing place both detergent probes into distilled water.
2. From the System PC open up the “Maintenance” menu.
3. Select “H/W Maintenance “.
4. Next double click “Rinsing Nozzle”. Displayed on the screen, select “detergent charge 15 times” twice. This will prime the
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Fig 5.11
Fig 5.12
Instrumentation Laboratory tubing and module with detergent. At this time observe the
Drain Pots 1 and 2 and to verify that dispensing is taking place.
5. Next select in maintenance menu “Rinse the cell by simulation”.
5.15
Fluidics
Fig 5.13
6. Take the Detergent probes out of the bottles verify that the dilution action will draw an air bubble into the tubing.
7. Place the tubing back into the solution. Follow the air bubble and verify that each cycle moves it towards the manifold 12 to
20 mm. Observe this for both probe assemblies.
8. If the air bubble travel is out of specification (12 to 20 mm), adjust the detergen volume by the setting the screw located at the rear of SV 81 (detergent 1) and SV 84 (detergent 2).
When adjusting detergent volume, the screw must be adjusted only while power for the valve is off; it is suggested to unplugging the valve connector for safety.
9. At this time check the tubing and the manifold module for any leaks.
5.5.4
Adjustment of the rinsing pot flow rate
The rinsing pots are used to provide wash to the outside of the probe and stirrer assemblies.
5.16
1. Verify that rinsing water is flowing to the Rinse Pot assemblies.
These are used for the Sample and reagent probes, also stirrer 1, stirrer 2 and the sample stirrer assembly (the Sample stirrer is an option).
2. The volume of water to the Rinse Pot assembles are controlled and is adjustable by a adjustment screw at the pot assembly.
This is only for the sample and reagent probe rinse pots.
Instrumentation Laboratory
Fig 5.14
ILab600 Service Manual
Adjustment is not needed at the stirrer paddles (the adjustment screws are not provided).
3. When the system is in the ready state flow to the Rinse Pots should be off. If any of the pot are flowing the associated solenoid valve should be check, cleaned and if necessary replaced. See table 5.2.
Insert 5.14
4. The Rinse Pots are adjustable by use of a thumb screw on the side of each assembly. The adjustment screw is manufactured with a diagonal taper to it, this will play in the adjustment.
Tighten or loosen the screw .This will increase or decrease the flow rate. Adjust the flow of rinsing water just above its outlet so that the probes and stirrers are rinsed, but not to over flow the rinse pot. When you have reached this be certain that the taper faces downward in its direction. Once again the stirrer pots are without adjustment screws . Check to see that water does flow and reaches the upper area of the pot assy. If not, cleaning or replacement of the observed troubled rinse pots solenoid may be needed. See table 5.6
5. Check all tubing and connectors for any leaks.
Table 5.6
Manifold connections Description
Solenoid valve 21 (SV21)
Solenoid valve 22 (SV22)
Controls water to the sample wash pot.
Controls water to the R1 wash pot.
Solenoid valve 23 (SV23)
Solenoid valve 24 (SV24)
Solenoid valve 25 (SV25)
Controls water to the R2 wash pot.
Controls water to stirrer 1&2 wash pots.
Controls water to the sample stirrer wash pot.
Instrumentation Laboratory
5.17
Fluidics
Fig 5.15
Fig 5.16
5.5.5
Check-out of the vacuum draining system
1. From the System PC “H/W Maintenance” menu select
“Simulation”
2. Make certain that the vacuum setting during instrument operation is -0.03 to 0.08 Mpa.
3. Make certain that the flow from the cuvettes moves freely to the drain pots.
5.18
Instrumentation Laboratory
Fig. 5.17
ILab600 Service Manual
4. Make certain that the waste material that accumulates in the pots flow down and into the drain when SV42 is closed to the vacuum source and when SV43 and SV44 are opened to the drain outlet.
5. Check also that the waste flows to the drain and not back to the
Vacuum Tank. If so SV 42 may need to be cleaned or replaced.
5.5.6
Check-out of the draining system
The drain system provides the analyzer the ability for access in water and waste removal. See fig. 5.17.
1. When the analysis operation is being performed, check the draining status from each rinsing pot. This includes sample,
R1, R2, both stirrers and if installed the sample stirrer Rinse
Pots.
2. Make certain that the drain flows smoothly into the drain tray and that the drain in the tray flows into the drain port without any overflow.
Instrumentation Laboratory
3. Make certain that the drain from the tray doesn’t splash.
When the analysis operation stops, pour instrument grade, if possible degassed water from the upper portion of the cuvette incubator assembly. See that the water should enter the drain via the overflow that is provided and flows smoothly out the drain.
4. Check that the drains in the reagent and sample tray wells work properly.
5.19
Fluidics
Fig 5.18
5.20
5. Disconnect the connector of the pure water tank level sensor for the feed tank assembly. Feed water should continuously start to flow. Observe the feed tank overflow, make sure the overflow drains smoothly out of the tank and to the drain port, check for leaks. Reconnect the sensor assembly connector.
6. Check the incubator draining cycle and Pure Water feed tank draining cycle. This is done by programming the Start Up or
Shut Down menus.
7. Replace the water in the incubator. Make certain that SV51 is opened and that the water in the incubator flows smoothly into the drain port. Check for leaks at this time.
8. Replace the feed tank water using the feed tank drain and replace program. Make certain that the tank empties smoothly into the drain port . Check for leaks at this time.
5.5.7
Bio-hazard Waste
The ILab 600 will come equipped with a bio-hazard waste removal system. This will allow the first wash station probe to draw contaminated sample out of the reaction cuvette and into a 20 litre waste container. The Bio-hazard waste assembly consists of a 20 litre container, container cap with float level detector and external drain hose. The drain hose is connected to the cap and the float level sensor cable is connected to the connector on the rear panel
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
of the ILab 600.
The waste evacuated from the cuvettes through rinse probes 1 and 6 is routed to the primary drain Pot 2. The outlet of Pot 2 is sent to the Bio-hazard waste container. When the liquid level in the waste container reaches approximately 17 litres the float sensor rises up and an alarm message “ Waste Bottle Full” is displayed. This alarm will not inhibit system operation.
Instrumentation Laboratory
5.23
ILab600 Service Manual
6 Temperature control
Temperature control is comprised of two systems. Control for the incubator (water bath ) system and limited control for the reagent compartment.
6.1 Reagent compartment
The reagent compartment houses the reagent tray assembly. The tray incorporates 32 outer positions for 50 and 20 ml bottles and
32 inner positions for 100, 50, and 20 ml bottles.
There are two different types, the standard type and special type for the 100 , 50 and 20ml bottles. This makes six different combinations of bottles that can be utilized with the reagent tray.
The tray locks in place and is removable for cleaning or storage else where.
6.1.1
Hardware description
The reagent compartment includes, the housing, cooling devices and fans to provide air flow for the cooling units. The compartment is cooled to 5-15°C or 41-59°F, a cover is provided to maintain cooling and prevent dust from entering the compartment.
The temperature is maintained even if the main switch is turn off, the main breaker on the back of the analyzer will turn off power to the assembly.
6.1.2
Operating cycle
The Reagent Tray temperature is controlled by the DC Power pcb. Three thermal modules (peltiers) are used to cool the reagent tray area. The three thermomodules are individually fused on the DC Power pcb. A thermistor is used to detect temperature.
The thermistor resistance increases as the Reagent Tray is cooling. When the resistance equates to 5°C the thermomodules
Instrumentation Laboratory
6.1
Temperature control
are turned off. When the thermistor resistance decreases the thermomodules are turned on to begin cooling again. This cycle continues to maintain cooling of the reagent tray.
If the Reagent Tray temperature exceeds approximately 15°C an alarm is displayed on the system PC. System operation is not interrupted or inhibited if reagent tray temperature alarms.
6.1.3
Check out / Adjustments
6.1.3.1
Measuring RGT compartment temperature
Temperature in the Reagent compartment can be measured by a thermometer.
6.1.3.1.a
Measuring temperature by thermometer.
a. Place a beaker full of water inside the reagent compartment and close the Reagent compartment with the cover, wait several minutes in order to allow the temperature of the water to stabilize. View the thermometer several times to determine stabilization.
b. After the thermometer is stabilized record the value. Temperature should be between 5°-15° C or 41°-59° F.
6.1.3.1.b
Adjustment of Reagent Tray Cooling
a. Locate the DC Power pcb. Connect a Digital Voltmeter between TP3 and TP2 (ground). If necessary, adjust VR-2 to obtain a voltage of 2.56 vdc ± 20 mv.
b. On the DC Power pcb disconnect the Reagent Tray thermistor
CN-8. Connect a Digital Voltmeter between TP1 and TP2
(ground). If necessary, adjust VR-1 to obtain a voltage of
5.00vdc ± 50mv.
c. Reconnect the Reagent Tray thermistor CN-8.
6.2
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
6.2 Incubator bath
The incubator assembly maintains the incubator water level and temperature at 37°C or 98.6°F . The incubator utilizes a water bath and degassed water, which is supplied and circulated by the circulator pump. The water level is sensed by a sensor probe assembly which controls SV34, this controls addition degassed water into the system if required. Temperature is maintained by the degassed water flowing through the cooler unit and then circulated , sensed and heated to a constant temperature (37°C) by the heater assembly. Heating control is accomplished and adjusted at the Assembly Temp Control PCB. See table 6.1 for descriptions. The Temp Control PCB also generates +5vdc,
+15vdc and -15vdc which is used to power other circuitry. The bath water also cools the Lamp Housing. If Lamp Housing temperature reaches 65°C a thermostat located in the housing will open removing power from the lamp. If the thermostat opens it must be replaced. The thermostat requires an extremely cold temperature to reset.
Table 6.1.
Incubator connections
Solenoid valve 34 (SV34)
Pump
Cooler unit
Heater/Thermostat
Incubator Bath
Lamp housing
Solenoid valve 51 (SV51)
Bath level sensor
Temperature Control PCB
Description
Control the feed of water to the bath assembly.
Provides water bath circulation.
Cools Bath and aids in thermal regulation.
Heats and regulates bath water temperature.
Thermistor resistance is 8.521KOhm at 37°C
Provides circulation of bath water around cuvettes for incubation.
Cools the lamp, cancels lamp housing from affecting incubation. Thermostat protects lamp housing if temperature reaches 65°C.
Drain degassed water and incubator to system drain.
Detects the level on bath water and controls SV34.
Controls bath temperature .This is accomplished with the use of the heater and thermistor assembly. Also generates +/- 15 vdc, +5 vdc for use by other circuitry.
Instrumentation Laboratory
6.3
Temperature control
Figure 6.1 - incubator fluidics
DETERGENT 2
DETERGENT 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
6.4
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 6.2
ILab600 Service Manual
6.2.1
Hardware description
The incubator system ultlizes a pump, a cooler, a heater/ thermistor and a bath assembly.
Figure 6.3
The lamp housing is also part of the flow system and may have an influence on the bath system. The bath assembly provides liquid level sensing and the ability to fill and drain on command by direct interaction or scheduled commands from the System PC. The use of solenoid valve (SV34) adds water to the bath and solenoid valve (SV51) allows the incubator bath assembly to drain.
Instrumentation Laboratory
6.5
Temperature control
6.2.2
Operating cycle
When the analyzer in turned on, the pump circulates the bath water around the incubator system. Bath water is pumped into the cooling unit, this decreases the bath temperature so it can be heated and measured at the Heater/ thermistor assembly to a constant temperature. The bath water enters the bath assembly and the water level is sensed by the bath level sensors, additional degassed water through solenoid valve (SV 34) can be received when the level is detected low by the sensors.
If a low level is detected for a period of time, the analyzer will request the R2 probe to dispense detergent automatically into the bath. No warning is given to the probe movement . Injury may occur.
The bath water also circulates around the lamp housing and is returned to the bath assembly. This is drawn out of the bath through a out flow port and is recirculated through the incubator system by its circulator pump.
The cooler assembly reduces the bath temperature by circulating the water through cooling fins to draw the heat out of the water. A fan forces air passed the fins to provide the cooling operation.
The heater provides a regulated source of heating and a thermistor to sense the temperature of the incubator. The Temperature control PCB controls the temperature of the bath water.
The bath assembly is a plastic housing that provides water circulation for the incubation of the cuvettes. It has flow connectors that provide inlet and out flows for the circulated bath water. The bath level sensor is located on the assembly and is seated next to the overflow port.
The lamp housing is included in the flow of the incubator. It is separate and only provides cooling for the quartz lamp .
6.2.3
Check out and adjustments
Tools and test equipment.
Incubator bath temperature adjustment will require the temperature test box, or digital thermometer.
6.2.3.1
Adjustment procedure bath temp.
6.2.3.1.a
Using Temperature Test Box (Preferred Method)
1 . Calibrate the test box. The test box output for the 37°C mode must be adjusted to 8.521KW. Set switch B to 37°C position and connect an ohmmeter to the cable connector pins 9 and 7.
Adjust pot to 8.521KW.
6.6
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
2. Connect the test box to CN12 on the Temp Control PCB. Turn on power. (see figure 6.4 Temp Control pcb)
3. Make sure that LED19 (bath water level sensor status) is extinguished while the switch “A” on the test box is closed, and that LED19 is lit while switch “A” is open. Close switch “A”.
4. Connect the digital voltmeter between TP3 (ground) and TP8. If necessary adjust VR1 to 5.0vdc ±10mV. Paint lock VR1.
5. Set the switch to “37°C”. Connect the digital voltmeter between
TP3 (ground) and TP10. If necessary adjust VR3 to -3.7vdc
±10 mV. Paint lock VR3.
6. Connect the digital voltmeter between TP3 (ground) and TP9. If necessary adjust VR2 (heater control) to +3.7vdc ±10mV.
7. Connect the digital voltmeter between TP3 (ground) and TP11.
If necessary adjust VR4 (display reading) to 0vdc ±20mV.
8. Disconnect the test box and reconnect CN12 on the Temp
Control bd.
6.2.3.1.b
Using Thermometer (Alternative Method)
1. Insure the bath level is full and has been warmed up for at least
15 minutes. Also insure cuvettes are filled with DH20 (approx
400ml) and warmed up for at least 15 minutes.
2. Place the thermometer probe into cuvette 55 on the reaction disk. Allow sufficient time for the thermometer to stabilize.
3. Connect the digital voltmeter between TP3 (ground) and TP8. If necessary adjust VR1 to 5.0vdc ±10mv.
4. Observe the temperature indicated on the thermometer. If it is not 37°C +/- 0.1 the temperature must be adjusted. Adjust
VR2 until the thermometer indicates 37°C ± 0.1. Adjust VR2 slowly. There will be a lag between the adjustment and the temperature change due to the circulation of the water and efficiency of the heater. VR2 is a 30 rotation pot. One complete rotation is equal to approximately 0.047°C. Clockwise rotation will decrease temperature.
5. After the temperature has stabilized at 37°C connect the digital voltmeter between TP3 (ground) and TP10. Voltage should be approximately -3.7vdc
6. Connect the digital voltmeter between TP3 (ground) and TP9.
Voltage should be approximately +3.7vdc.
7. The temperature indication on the CRT display should match the temperature indicated on the thermometer. If necessary adjust VR4 until the display matches the thermometer temperature. Connect the digital voltmeter between TP3 (ground) and TP11. Voltage should be approximately 0.0vdc.
Instrumentation Laboratory
6.7
Temperature control
After completion of temperature adjustment observe LED’s 22
- 29 on the Temp Control PCB. When the incubator bath is at
37°C LED 22 (MSB) should be lit.
X means LED “ON”———O means LED “OFF” led22————led29
XOOOOOOO 36.9°C
OXXXXXXX 37.0°C
OXXXXXXO 37.1°C
Figure 6.4
6.8
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 6.5
ILab600 Service Manual
6.2.3.3
Checkout of water level sensor
There is a liquid level sensor which controls the incubator water level on the left side in the incubator. This level sensor ,which is electrode type can not detect the incubator water if it is stained.
Cleaning of the level sensors should be done once a month with a soft cloth, the analyzer should be turned off to avoid injury.
There is no adjustment for the incubator water level sensor.
Instrumentation Laboratory
6.9
Temperature control
Figure 6.6
Figure 6.7
When the power to the equipment is turned on, do not remove the liquid level sensor. If this is removed ,the analyzer interprets the removal as insufficient incubator water levels and is replenished automatically.
A caution should be noted, if this conditions continues for a period of time the 2nd reagent probe will move automatically to dispense detergent into the bath. This is to maintain the detergent concentration of the incubator water. Injury may occur.
6.10
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Clean the water level sensor as follows:
1. Turn off power
2. Hold the hook connector of the liquid level sensor and pull out the two connectors together.
3. The electrodes of the liquid level sensor are located on the smaller connector. Check them for stains.
If there are stains on the electrodes, wipe them off with a soft cloth or tissue carefully. Take care not to break them and if the ends are corroded or shows signs of wear replace them.
4. Re-place the liquid level sensors.
5. Turn on the power.
Instrumentation Laboratory
6.11
ILab600 Service Manual
7 ISE
7.1 ISE Description
ISE module is an option of the ILab600 system, and it is used for the determination of Na, K and Cl in sample solution.
A diagram indicating the fluidical and mechanical items (including the fluidics sensors) is shown in figure 7.1.
Figure 7.1 - ISE block diagram
R E A G E N T 2 S E N S P C B
S V 8
S L O P E
S O L U T I O N
1 0 0 m l
R E A G E N T 1 S E N S P C B
S A M P L E P R O B E
M O D U L E
S L O P E
S O L U T I O N
P O T
D I L U T IO N
P O T
M IX E R 1
S V 9
I S E
D E G A S S E R
S V 4
S V 1
S V 7
S V 3S V 2
S V 6
S V 5
E L E C T R O D E
B O X
M IX E R 2
N a K C l e le c tro d e s
R E F
L E V E L
S E N S
L E V E L
S E N S
L E V E L
S E N S .
C A L
S P L D IL
R E F
1 .0 L
D I L U E N T
2 .0 L
S IN G L E
S Y R IN G E
M O D U L E
P W P S W
P O R T
D E G A S S E R
D E G A S S E R M O D U L E O F ILa b 6 0 0 S Y S T E M
T R IP L E
S Y R IN G E
M O D U L E
M 1
P U R E
W A T E R
F R O M
M A N IF O L D
D R A IN T U B E
D R A IN
D R A IN B A S E
7.1
Instrumentation Laboratory
ISE Module
Main items are the following: a. three Ion Selective Electrodes plus the Reference electrode for the determination on Na, K and Cl concentration of a sample solution. Electrode are housed into the Electrode box.
b. ISE on-line solutions are the following:
Solution
Calibrator (1.0 l)
Slope solution (0.1 l)
Diluent solution (2.0 l)
Reference solution (1.0 l)
Concentration (unit:mmol/l)
Na:140 K:4.0 Cl:100
Na:200 K:8.0 Cl:160
Na:7.0 K:0.2 Cl:5.0
1M ammonium chloride
Figure 7.2 - location of ISE main items, side view
7.2
c. Reagent 1 sensor pcb and Reagent 2 sensor pcb are equipped by optical photosensors for monitoring the presence of liquid/air bubbles in the supply piping of reference solution,
Instrumentation Laboratory
calibrator, diluent and slope solution.
Figure 7.3 - Location of ISE main items, front view
ILab600 Service Manual
Instrumentation Laboratory d. ISE degasser is used for degassing degassing diluent, calibrator and reference solution.
e. Triple syringe module is used for aspirating and dispensing sample, diluent and reference solutions. Operation is performed by a stepper motor that controls the three specific syringes which handle the three solutions. The three syringe pistons are moved together by a single plate.
f. Single syringe module is used for aspirating and dispensing calibrator solution.
g. Sample probe module is used for aspirating the required
7.3
ISE Module
Figure 7.4 - Tray
volume sample/slope solution from the sample cup/tube and slope pot and for dispensing into the dilution pot.
h Tray including the Dilution pot, Slope solution pot and
Rinsing pot (see fig 7.4).
7.4
7.1.1
Principle of operation
Analytical cycle is performed as follows: a. Sample/slope solution is aspirated from sample cup/slope pot
(sample volume is 24 ul) through the sample probe by the sample syringe. At the same time also the diluent and reference syringes are filled by diluent and reference solutions.
As the required sample volume has been picked-up, sample syringe continues aspirating calibrator solution.
b. Sample is dispensed into the dilution pot. At the same time also diluent and reference solutions are dispensed.
Diluent is dispensed into the lower inlet of the dilution pot: sample+diluent are mixed (in mixers 1 and 2) then injected into the electrode box,where the electrical offset of sample measurement is detected.
Reference solution is injected into the reference electrode.
Purpose of the reference solution is to provide electrical interconnection between Na, K and Cl electrodes (through the sample path).
c. As all sample has been dispensed, the triple syringe module continues dispensing calibrator solution plus diluent and reference solution. Reading of the electrical offset of calibrator measurement is recorded.
d. At the completion of the measurement cycle the sample probe
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
is moved into the rinsing pot and it es washed inside and outside.
e. Analysis cycle is completed. The ISE module is ready for a new cycle.
f. Internal calibration cycle is performed similarly as per above steps a. to d. but, instead of sample solution, Slope solution is measured.
7.1.2
ISE Specification
Sample type:
Measuring range:
Serum, Plasma, urine
Na: 10 to 400 mmol/l
K: 1 to 200 mmol/l
Cl: 15 to 400 mmol/l
Measuring method: Indirect potentiometry
Sample volume: 24
µ l
Dilution ratio: 1:21.7
Throughput:
Calibration:
Electrodes:
1 sample/27 sec
1: Automatic two point calibration (by on-line cal. and slope sol.)
2: 3 point calibration, periodical (by external calibrators)
Na: Crown ether liquid membrane type PVC electrode
Reagent:
Temperature:
Humidity:
Power supply:
K: Valinomycin liquid membrane type PVC electrode
Cl: Quaternary ammonium salt type solid membrane electrode
Diluent: 1435
µ l/sample
Calibrator: 390
µ l/sample
Reference solution: 690
µ l/sample
15 to 30 °C (fluctuation less than +/-3°C/hour)
45 to 80% RH (defrost) supply through the ILab600 system (consumption approx 60VA)
7.2 ISE Electronics description
A block diagram of ISE electronics is reported in figure 7.5 in next page.
Main boards of the ISE electroncs are:
- ISE Main pcb
- ISE preamp pcb
- Reagent sensor 1 pcb
- Reagent sensor 2 pcb
- ISE nozzle pcb
A detailed description of each pcb is provided here below:
7.2.1
ISE Main pcb
(Refer to the electronic diagram included in the manual "ILab600 -
Field Service Drawings).
The ISE main board performs the following tasks:
Instrumentation Laboratory
7.5
ISE Module
7.6
a. controls and drives all the mechanical modules (ISE sample probe module, single syringe module, triple syringe module.
b. drives all the ISE solenoid valves (9 electrovalves) c. receives the electrodes offset reference from the ISE preamp.
pcb and performs A/D conversion d. monitors status of the reagent sensors (4 sensors) and the bottle sensors (3 sensors)
The ISE main board communicates with the ILab600 system by a serial line (current loop)
Main items of the ISE main board are:
CPU microprocessor
IC M16 (80C85A) is the CPU, and controls the operations of the
ILab600 ISE module. The operation speed of the CPU is 4 MHz because the CPU divides the oscillator Xl into 1/2.
IC M25 (27512) is a ROM in which the programs specifying the
CPU operations are saved.
IC M26 (84256) is a random access memory (RAM). The maximum physical memory capacity of the ROM and the RAM is
56 kB and 32 kB respectively.
The maximum address space of the CPU is 64 kB, the CPU can access only 56 kB of the ROM and only 8 kB of the RAM.
IC M17 (TL7705) is an IC to reset the CPU. M17 sends the reset signal (L level) to the CPU when the 5 VDC power supply is 4.5 V or less to prevent overrun of the CPU during turning on of the power or random power interruption.
IC M18 (HC245) is a buffer for the address of the CPU signal output.
IC Ml9 (HC373) holds the address output from the CPU on the time-sharing basis and holds the address signal contained in the data.
ICs M24, M27 M28 and M29 (HC138) are decoders. They decode the address signal from the CPU, and output the selective signal to the ROM/RAM and the I/O control IC.
IC M30 (HC245) is a data bus buffer between the CPU and the
I/O control IC.
IC M31 (82C59) is controls CPU interruptions.
ICs M32 and M33 (82C53) are timer ICs. They count the clock signal, and send the count completion signal to the M31 when the value specified preliminarily by the CPU is reached.
IC M31, when receiving the count completion signal, starts interruptions of the CPU (time control and driving of the pulse motor by the CPU).
Instrumentation Laboratory
SV8
LIQUID SENSOR 4
BLUE
BLUE
RED
OUT
GREEN
RED
IN
GREEN
SLOPE
SOLUTION
100ml
LIQUID SENSOR 1
LIQUID SENSOR 2
LIQUID SENSOR 3
CAPACITOR
ASSY
SV9
PROBE
RINSING
POT
SV7
SV4
SV3 SV2 SV1
SV6
SV5
REFERENCE
1.0L
CALIBRATOR
1.0L
DILUENT
2.0L
VUCUUM PUMP
PW PSW
PORT DEGASSER
THESE ITEMS ARE SHARED BETWEEN THE ILab600
SYSTEM FLUIDICS AND THE ISE FLUIDICS
5.05
M2
1.6
7.28
OUT
TRIPLET SYRINGE PUMP
IN
2-WAY VALVE
DETAIL DRAWING
5.05
M1
MIXER 1
DRAIN
DRAIN TUB
MIXER 2
Na K Cl electrodes
REF
DRAIN
DRAIN BASE
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Communication with ILab600
IC M37 (82C51) performs serial communication between the
ISE CPU andILab600 main unit. Serial communication is performed in the current loop, and the +12 V power supply for serial communication is provided by IC M59 (7812).
IC M38 (8640C) generates the clock for serial communication.
The clock frequency can be set by DIP switch S1, which determines the serial communication speed.
Serial communication is performed via the CN4. Pins 5 to 18 of
CN4 are used for transferringe information on system status
(READY, sampling being performed, sampling enabled, error, etc.).
IC M39 (HC175) is a latch for the output from the CPU, and changes the status information signal in accordance with the signal sent from the CPU.
ICs M40 and M41 (HC245) are tri-state buffers for the input to the
CPU, and helps the CPU while the CPU is reading the status information signal and the status of the DIP switches Sl and S2.
(functions of the DIP switches are described later).
Electrometry
CN2 is connected to the preamplifier. Pins 3, 7, 11 and 13 are the output the Na , K , Cl and reference electrodes respectively.
Electrode offset during analysis may be monitored by connecting a recorder between TP 4 (negative) and TP 1 (Na), TP 2 (K) or
TP 3 (Cl). Pins 1, 5 and 9 are the output from the Na, the K and the Cl subtracted by the output from the reference electrode and amplified by 20 times. They are handled through the low-pass filter consisting of the resistor and the capacitor as well as the buffer amplifiers Ml and M2, then are connected to the input of the analog multiplexer M5 (ADG526A).
Liquid sensors
The output of the liquid sensors are also connected to the analog multiplexer M5 (ADG526A) through connector CN3.
A/D conversion
The analog multiplexer selects and outputs one input at the time, so performing the same function as a rotary switch.
A/D conversion is performed by the V/F converter M6 (AD652) which converts voltage reference into frequency, the timer IC M8
(82C53) and the counter ICs M10 to M12 (HC393) which count the frequency over the period specified by the CPU. CPU then reads the count value.
7.9
ISE Module
7.10
Specification of A/D conversion are the following:
M6 input: -5 to +5 VDC
M6 output: with input -5VDC: 0Hz
M6 output: with input +5VDC: 1MHz
Wave form of M6 output: square wave 0-5VDC
The count-period (A/D conversion period) is shown below.
(Na-REF) x 20: 200 ms
(K-REF) x 20: 200 ms
(Cl-REF) x 20: 200 ms
REF: 100 ms
Liquid sensor: 100 ms
Analog ground: 100 ms
Resolution of A/D conversion is: 10 V/(l MHz x 0.2) = 50
µ
V when the conversion period is 200 ms. As Na/K/Cl electrode output is amplified by 20 times by the amplifier, the resolution of
Na, Cl and K is 2.5
µ
V, 2.5
µ
V and 5.0
µ
V respectively.
Bottle sensors
Level of the diluent, calibrator and reference solution bottles is monitored by electrostatic capacity liquid sensors. The electrostatic capacity liquid sensors output is an ON/OFF signal, and they are connected to connector CN7. When the remaining quantity of the reagent inside the bottle becomes approximately
1/10 or less, the electrostatic capacity type bottle liquid sensor switches to OFF and the system detects bottle shortage. When the remaining quantity of the reagent is 1/10 or more, the output is
ON (L).
Motor drivers
ICs M51 (HC175) and M52 (LS06), M43 to M46 (HC175), and the
M47 to the M50 (SLA7024M) are the pulse motor driving circuits.
Description of the syringe pump drive motor is provided below:
-The CPU generates the pulse motor driving signal.
-IC M43 (HC175) receives the syringe pump pulse motor driving signal sent from the CPU and controls to the pulse motor driver IC
M47 (SLA7024M).
-M47 drives the pulse motor at a constant current.
-the constant corrent value is set by R23, R19, R39 and R40.
-two values of constant current are set automatically: high current,
used during high speed cycle, and low current, used during low
speed cycle.
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
-current values are the following:
Motor
Syringe pump1
Syringe pump2
Probe vertical
Probe rotation
High current
- - -
- - -
800 mA
- - -
Low current
400 mA
400 mA
400 mA
400 mA
-Motors of pump1 and pump2: run always at low current. When
motor is not running (in stop position), it is not energized (it is
released)
-Motor of probe vertical runs as follows: hig-speed operation (>1,500 PPS): high current low-speed operation (<1,500 PPS): low current stop position: low current
-Motor of probe horizontal runs always at low low current
The CN5 is connected to the pulse motor for the syringe pump 1, the pulse motor for the syringe pump2, the photo sensor for detecting the home position of the syringe pump1 and the photo sensor for detecting the home position of the syringe pump2.
Typical resistance of the stepper motor windings is 3 to 5 Ohm
Solenoid valves
ICs M53, M54 (HC273), and M55 to M58 (TD62064) are the solenoid valve driver circuits.
M53 and M54 receive the valve driving signal output from the
CPU, and control M55 to M58 which are the solenoid valve power drivers (transistor arrays). 24 VDC is always applied to one end of the solenoid valve, and the other end is connected to the transistor array. Transistor array works as a switch, connecting the solenoid valve to the power ground.
7.2.2
Preamplifier description
Data acquisition is performed by Ion Selective Electrodes.
Electrodes offsets are connected to the Preamplifier pcb.
Figure 7.7 below shows a block diagram of one electrode preamplification channel. Preamplifier pcb includes 3 identical preamplifier channels for Na, K and Cl electrodes.
No amplification if provided for Reference electrode. Ref.
electrode channel is buffered only.
Instrumentation Laboratory
7.11
ISE Module
Figure 7.7 - Preamplifier pcb block diagram
7.12
Principle of operation of the Preamplifier pcb is the following: a. Electrode input is connected to an op amp that provides impedence adapting (high impedence input - low impedence output) b. Output at gain 1 of Electrode offset is provided throug a buffer c. Electrode offset is also subctracted of the Ref electrode offset, then it is amplified (amplifier gain 20).
d. Output at gain 20 is provided c. The two electrode outputs are connected to the ISE Main
CPU
7.2.3
Liquid sensors control description
Specific photosensors are used for monitoring the presence of air/liquid inside the ISE solutions supply tubings.
All photosensors are located in two PCBs monitoring the following solutions:
Solution
Slope solution
Diluent solution
Reference solution
Calibrator solution
PCB
Liquid sensor 2 pcb
Liquid sensor 1 pcb
Liquid sensor 1 pcb
Liquid sensor 1 pcb
Principle of operation: a. figure 7.8 shows typical block diagram of liquid sensor circuitry.
Main items are: photosensor, comparator and amplifier
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 7.8 - liquid sensor block diagram
ILab600 Service Manual
Instrumentation Laboratory a. Photosensor includes an emitter LED and a detector phototransistor. Tubing is located between emitter and detector. Whenever liquid is in the tubing, the light emitted by the LED reaches the phototransistor. Whenever air is in the tubing, light beam is scattered, and no light reaches the phototransistor.
Typical voltage measured on the phototransistor (position A) is:
Air: 2.5 to 4.0 VDC
Liquid: 0.2 to 1.0 VDC higher then air voltage c. Purpose of the comparator block is to set a 0 VDC output value
(position B) when air is measured. 0 VDC value is adjusted by trimmer VR1.
d. Purpose of the amplifier is to set an output difference of 3 VDC
(TP1) between air and liquid measurement. Amplifier gain can be adjusted betwen 1 to 11 by trimmer VR2.
7.13
ISE Module
7.3 ISE Fluidics
Diagram of the ISE fluidics is shown in fig 7.6 page 7.7.
Detailed information on ISE fluidics operating cycles are provided in the timing diagrams in sec 7.5 ISE operating cycles description
7.4 Mechanical description
Mechanical modules of the ISE unit are described below:
Detailed information on mechanical operating cycles are provided in diagram in figure 7.12
7.4.1
Sample probe module
Purpose of the sample probe module is to pick-up the specified sample/slope solution volume from the sample tray/slope solution pot (24
µ l) and dispense it into the dilution pot.
Sample probe module is equipped by two stepper motors, for the vertical and rotational displacement of the probe.
Layout of the Sample probe module is shown in fig 7.9 below.
The sample probe (not shown in figure 7.9) is fixed to the sample probe holder. The holder is fixed to the probe arm by a spring shock absorber with a shock sensor. If a shock is detected during a vertical probe-down mechanical operation, the operation is interrupted immediately and an alarm is reported.
The sample probe is not provided by liquid level sensor. The system, in order to determine the sample level into the cup/tube, refers to the sample detection performed by the Chemistry sample probe module.
The sample probe module is provided by an optical sensor with mechanical flag for the vertical up/down operation. Integrity check of the vertical operation is performed at any cycle.
If any error is detected, the system stops and an alarm is reported.
The sample probe module is provided by an encoder disk for the horizontal rotational operation (refer to fig. 7.10 below). Integrity check of the rotational operation is performed at any cycle.
If any error is detected, the system stops and an alarm is reported.
7.14
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 7.9 - Sample probe module
ILab600 Service Manual
Fig. 7.10 - sample probe module bottom view
Optical sensor
Encoder disk
Instrumentation Laboratory
7.15
ISE Module
7.4.2
Syringe modules
ISE module is equipped by two syringe modules: a. the triple syringe module b. the single syringe module
Figure 7.11 below shows the two syringe modules
Figure 7.11 - single syringe and triple syringe modules
The plungers of the three syringes of the triple syringe module
(sample, diluent and ref. solution) are mechanically interconnected, the three syringes are therefore filling/dispensing at the same time.
Syringes are actuated by a stepper motor and a belt.
An optical sensor with mechanical flag are used for detecting home position of the module and checking operation integrity.
If any error is detected during operation, an alarm is reported.
7.5 ISE Operating cycles description
Timing chart repoted in figures 7.13 to 7.16 describe operating cycles of the ISE module.
Fig 7.13 - ILab600 ISE sample analysis cycle
Fig 7.14 - ILab600 ISE Internal calibration cycle
Fig 7.15 - ILab600 ISE Rinse cycle
Fig 7.16 - ILab600 ISE Dummy analysis cycle
7.16
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 7.12 mechanical cycle
Horizontal motor
0.9°/P (Full)
SENSOR
Vertical motor
1.8°/P (full)
0.15mm/P
Pressing travel
2.1mm
1.6mm
0 0
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
7.17
ISE module
Figure 7.15
SV 5
SV 6
SV 7
SV 8
SV 1
SV 2
SV 3
SV 4
ILab600 ISE - Rinse cycle
1 2 3
Up
0
PROBE
UP/ DOWN
D
Down
PROBE
ROTATION slope pot dilution pot waste rinse pure water sample disk
0
Up
0
TRIPLE
SYRINGE
Down
1
1
2
2
3
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CAL
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Up
0
CAL SYRINGE
Down
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
On
Off
0
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
7.20
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Figure 7.16
ILab600 ISE - Du m m y analysis cycle
1 2 3 4 5
UP
0
PROBE
UP/ DOWN
Down
6
PROBE
ROTATION slope pot dilution pot waste rinse pure water sample disk
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
UP
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
TRIPLE
SYRINGE
Down
SV 1
SV 2
SV 3
SV 4
SV 5
SV 6
SV 7
SV 8
SV 9
UP
0
CAL SYRINGE
Down
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A/ D A/ D
CAL
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
7.21
Instrumentation Laboratory
ISE Module
7.6.1
Electronic adjustments
7.6.1.1
ISE Main pcb - Setting and use of DIP switches and LEDs
7.6.1.1.a
Default configurations
DIP switch S1:
S1-1: ON
S1-2:
S1-3:
OFF
ON
S1-4: OFF
DIP switch S2:
All OFF
Dip switch S3:
All OFF
7.6.1.1.b
Use of local Diagnostic program
A local diagnostic program resident on EPROM is available, and can be set by DIP switch S3. The local diagnostic program allows some features useful for service activity, as:
- to perform mechanical/fluidical operations (move motors, switch ON solenoid valves, etc
- monitor (on LEDs) sensors status in real time
- report error conditions by LEDs code.
The local diagnostic can be enabled and used as follows: a. Set dip SW 3-7 ON
Note: dip SW 3-7 set the ISE module for routine mode (SW 3-7
OFF) or diagnostic mode (SW 3-7 ON). When it is set for routine use all othes SW switches (SW 3-8 and SW 1 to 6) are disabled.
Note: no Reset is required after dip SW 3-7 has been set ON b. Set the operation to be performed by configuring dip SW 3-1 to 3-6 (refer to tables below) c. Perform the operation by operating SW 3-8 (from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON indifferently, SW 3-8 works as a toggle switch).
Note: If an error is detected by the system while performing an operation, the next commands will not be performed.
7.22
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
S3-1 S3-2 S3-3 S3-4 S3-5 S3-6 function
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF initialize all motors
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF initialize probe initialize triplet syringe
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF -
ON OFF OFF ON OFF -
OFF ON OFF ON OFF -
ON ON OFF ON OFF -
OFF OFF ON ON OFF -
ON OFF ON ON OFF -
OFF ON ON ON OFF -
ON ON ON ON OFF -
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF initialize cal syringe rotate probe to slope pot rotate probe to dilution pot rotate probe to waste rotate probe to rinse rotate probe to pure water rotate probe to sample disk-in
See note 1
See note 1
See note 1
See note 1
See note 1
See note 1
rotate probe to sample disk-mid See note 1 rotate probe to sample disk-out See note 1 up/down probe to top
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF
ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
OFF ON ON ON ON ON up/down probe to mid up/down probe to bottom up/down triplet syringe to top up/down triplet syringe to mid up/down triplet syringe to bottom up/down cal syringe to top up/down cal syringe to mid up/down cal syringe to bottom
SV1
SV2
SV3
SV4
SV5
SV6
SV7
SV8
See note 2
See note 2
See note 2
See note 2
See note 2
See note 2
See note 2
See note 2
SV9
See note 2
adjust probe rotationset excitation pattern of starting point
Instrumentation Laboratory
7.23
ISE Module
S3-1 S3-2 S3-3 S3-4 S3-5 S3-6 function
ON ON ON ON ON ON check sensors (monitor in real time sensor status on LED as per table below)
LED Sensor
D4 ref reagent bottle sensor on:detect reagent
Purpose
off:no reagent
D5 diluent reagent bottle sensor on:detect reagent
D6 cal reagent bottle sensor on:detect reagent off:no reagent off:no reagent
D7 probe shock sensor
D8 probe rotation sensor
D9 probe up/down sensor
D10 cal syringe sensor
D11 triplet syringe sensor on:sensor on on:sensor on on:sensor on on:sensor on on:sensor on off:sensor off off:sensor off off:sensor off off:sensor off off:sensor off
Note 1: S3-6 OFF Set the excitation of probe up/down motor
OFF. S3-6 ON Set the excitation of probe up/down motor ON after rotation. This command is active after rotation
Note 2: 5 times on/off solenoid valve interval of 1second (on
1second,off 1second)
7.24
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
LED STATUS O= led on X= led off B= led blinking
LED D4 D6 D8 D10
D5 D7 D9 D11 status error code
O O O O O X X X starting up -
O X O O O X X X normal -
B B B B B B B B emergency stop by command -
List of LED error conditions
O O O O X X X O ram error no error condition no error condition no error condition
Start-up error
O O O O X X O O electrical circuit error
O O O O O O O O cpu reset
X X X X X X X O serial communication data format error
Start-up error
Abnormal condition
$ 0 1
X X X X X X O X serial communication data number error
X X X X X X O O serial communication bcc error
X X X X X O X X serial communication over run error
X X X X X O X O serial communication framing error
X X X X X O O O a/d conversion time out (Na)
X X X X O X X X a/d conversion time out (K)
X X X X O X X O a/d conversion time out (Cl)
$ 0 2
$ 0 3
$ 0 4
$ 0 5
$ 0 7
$ 0 8
$ 0 9
X X X X O X O X a/d conversion time out (Ref)
X X X X O X O O a/d conversion time out (RS1)
X X X X O O X X a/d conversion time out (RS2)
X X X X O O X O a/d conversion time out (RS3)
X X X X O O O X a/d conversion time out (RS4)
X X X X O O O O a/d conversion time out (GND)
X X X O X X X X a/d conversion data error (Na)
X X X O X X X O a/d conversion data error (K)
X X X O X X O X a/d conversion data error (Cl)
X X X O X X O O a/d conversion data error (Ref)
X X X O X O X X a/d conversion data error (RS1)
X X X O X O X O a/d conversion data error (RS2)
X X X O X O O X a/d conversion data error (RS3)
X X X O X O O O a/d conversion data error (RS4)
X X X O O X X X a/d conversion data error (GND)
$ 1 0
$ 1 1
$ 1 2
$ 1 3
$0A
$0B
$ 0 C
$0D
$ 0 E
$ 0 F
$ 1 4
$ 1 5
$ 1 6
$17
$ 1 8
Instrumentation Laboratory
7.25
ISE Module
LED STATUS O= led on X= led off B= led blinking
D4 D6 D8 D10
D5 D7 D9 D11 status error code
X X X O O O O O probe error up/down sensor on during rotation
X X O X X X X X probe rotation error sensor on 40 pulse at initialization
X X O X X X X O probe rotation error backlash 5 pulse at initialization
$1F
$20
$21
$22 X X O X X X O X probe rotation error sensor off 328 pulse at initialization
X X O X X X O O probe rotation error sense 9 sectors (position) at initialization $23
X X O X X O X X probe rotation error sensor on between slope pot and dilution pot rotating left $24
X X O X X O X O probe rotation errorsensor off at dilution pot rotating left $25
X X O X X O O X probe rotation errorsensor on between dilution pot and waste rotating left $26
X X O X X O O O probe rotation errorsensor off at waste rotating left $27
X X O X O X X X probe rotation error sensor on between waste and rinse rotating left $28
X X O X O X X O probe rotation error sensor off at rinse rotating left $29
X X O X O X O X probe rotation error sensor on between rinse and pure water rotating left $2A
X X O X O X O O probe rotation error sensor off at pure water rotating left $2B
X X O X O O X X probe rotation error sensor on between pure water and disk-in rotating left $2C
X X O X O O X O probe rotation error sensor off at disk-in rotating left $2D
X X O X O O O X probe rotation error sensor on between disk-in and disk-mid rotating left $2E
X X O X O O O O probe rotation error sensor off at disk-mid rotating left $2F
X X O O X X X X probe rotation error sensor on between disk-mid and disk-out rotating left $ 3 0
X X O O X X X O probe rotation error sensor off at disk-out rotating left $ 3 1
X X O O X X O X probe rotation error sensor on between disk-out and disk-mid rotating right $ 3 2
X X O O X X O O probe rotation error sensor off at disk-mid rotating right $ 3 3
X X O O X O X X probe rotation error sensor on between disk-mid and disk-in rotating right $34
X X O O X O X O probe rotation error sensor off at disk-in rotating right $35
7.26
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
LED STATUS O= led on X= led off B= led blinking
D4 D6 D8 D10
D5 D7 D9 D11 status error code
X X O O X O O X probe rotation error sensor on between disk-in and pure water rotating right $36
X X O O X O O O probe rotation error sensor off at pure water rotating right $37
X X O O O X X X probe rotation error sensor on between pure water and rinse rotating right $38
X X O O O X X O probe rotation error sensor off at rinse rotating right $39
X X O O O X O X probe rotation error sensor on between rinse and waste rotating right $3A
X X O O O X O O probe rotation error sensor off at waste rotating right $3B
X X O O O O X X probe rotation error sensor on between waste and dilution pot rotating right $3C
X X O O O O X O probe rotation error sensor off at dilution pot rotating right $3D
X X O O O O O X probe rotation error sensor on between dilution pot and slope pot rotating right $3E
X X O O O O O O probe rotation error sensor off at slope pot rotating right $3F
X O X X X X X X probe up/down errorsensor on 1640 pulse at initialization $40
X O X X X X X O probe up/down error sensor off 80 pulse at initialization $41
X O X X X X O X probe up/down error backlash 20 pulse at initialization
X O X X X X O O probe error rotation sensor off during up/down
X O X X X O X X probe up error sensor unusualy off at slope pot
X O X X X O X O
X O X X X O O X
X O X X X O O O probe up error sensor not turns off at slope pot probe up error sensor unusualy on at slope pot probe down error sensor unusualy on at slope pot
$42
$ 4 3
$ 4 4
$ 4 5
$ 4 6
$ 4 7
X O X X O X X X probe down error sensor unusualy off at slope pot
X O X X O X X O probe up error sensor unusualy off at dilution pot
X O X X O X O X probe up error sensor not turns off at dilution pot
X O X X O X O O probe up error sensor unusualy on at dilution pot
X O X X O O X X probe down error sensor unusualy on at dilution pot
X O X X O O X O probe down error sensor unusualy off at dilution pot
X O X X O O O X probe up error sensor unusualy off at waste
X O X X O O O O probe up error sensor not turns off at waste
X O X O X X X X probe up error sensor unusualy on at waste
$ 4 8
$ 4 9
$4A
$4B
$ 4 C
$4D
$4E
$4F
$50
Instrumentation Laboratory
7.27
ISE Module
LED STATUS O= led on X= led off B= led blinking
D4 D6 D8 D10
D5 D7 D9 D11 status error code
X O X O X X X O probe down error sensor unusualy on at waste
X O X O X X O X probe down error sensor unusualy off at waste
X O X O X X O O probe up error sensor unusualy off at rinse
X O X O X O X X probe up error sensor not turns off at rinse
X O X O X O X O probe up error sensor unusualy on at rinse
X O X O X O O X probe down error sensor unusualy on at rinse
X O X O X O O O probe down error sensor unusualy off at rinse
X O X O O X X X probe up error sensor unusualy off at pure water
X O X O O X X O probe up error sensor not turns off at pure water
X O X O O X O X probe up error sensor unusualy on at pure water
X O X O O X O O probe down error sensor unusualy on at pure water
X O X O O O X X probe down error sensor unusualy off at pure water
X O X O O O X O probe up error sensor unusualy off at disk-in
X O X O O O O X probe up error sensor not turns off at disk-in
X O X O O O O O probe up error sensor unusualy on at disk-in
X O O X X X X X probe down errorsensor unusualy on at disk-in
X O O X X X X O probe down error sensor unusualy off at disk-in
X O O X X X O X probe up error sensor unusualy off at disk-mid
X O O X X X O O probe up error sensor not turns off at disk-mid
X O O X X O X X probe up error sensor unusualy on at disk-mid
X O O X X O X O probe down error sensor unusualy on at disk-mid
X O O X X O O X probe down error sensor unusualy off at disk-mid
X O O X X O O O probe up error sensor unusualy off at disk-out
X O O X O X X X probe up error sensor not turns off at disk-out
X O O X O X X O probe up error sensor unusualy on at disk-out
$ 6 6
$ 6 7
$ 6 8
$ 6 9
X O O X O X O X probe down error sensor unusualy on at disk-out
X O O X O X O O probe down error sensor unusualy off at disk-out
X O O X O O X X probe errorsense shock $6C
X O O X O O X O probe error shock sensor not turns on at sensing down limit $6D
X O O O X X X X triplet syringe error sensor on 3600 pulse at initialization $70
X O O O X X X O triplet syringe error sensor off 500 pulse at initialization $71
$6A
$6B
$ 6 0
$ 6 1
$ 6 2
$ 6 3
$ 6 4
$ 6 5
$ 5 6
$ 5 7
$ 5 8
$ 5 9
$5A
$5B
$ 5 1
$ 5 2
$ 5 3
$ 5 4
$ 5 5
$ 5 C
$5D
$ 5 E
$ 5 F
7.28
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
LED STATUS O= led on X= led off B= led blinking
D4 D6 D8 D10
D5 D7 D9 D11 status error code
X O O O X X O X triplet syringe error backlash 100 pulse at initialization
X O O O X X O O triplet syringe up error sensor unusualy off
X O O O X O X X triplet syringe up error sensor not turns off
X O O O X O X O triplet syringe up error sensor unusualy on
X O O O X O O X triplet syringe down error sensor unusualy on
X O O O X O O O triplet syringe down error sensor unusualy off
O X X X X X X X cal syringe error sensor on 2156 pulse at initialization
O X X X X X X O cal syringe error sensor off 395 pulse at initialization
O X X X X X O X cal syringe error backlash 60 pulse at initialization
O X X X X X O O cal syringe up error sensor unusualy off
O X X X X O X X cal syringe up error sensor not turns off
O X X X X O X O cal syringe up error sensor unusualy on
O X X X X O O X cal syringe down error sensor unusualy on
O X X X X O O O cal syringe down error sensor unusualy off
O X X O X X X X samplig time out error
O O X X X X X X short sample
$ 7 7
$ 8 0
$ 8 1
$ 8 2
$ 8 3
$ 8 4
$ 8 5
$ 8 6
$ 8 7
$ 9 0
$ C 0
$ 7 2
$ 7 3
$ 7 4
$ 7 5
$ 7 6
Instrumentation Laboratory
7.29
ISE Module
7.6.1.2
Check-out and adjustment of liquid level sensor circuitries
This procedure can be used for adjusting all the circuitries of liquid sensors of Reference, Calibrator, Diluent and Slope solutions. Circuitry are resident in Reagent 1 sens pcb and
Reagent 2 sens pcb. Refr to fig 7.17 below:
Figure 7.17 - Liquid level sensor
7.30
a. measure voltage at TP1. With tubing filled by air TP1 should be 0VDC +/- 100mV.
b. With tubing filled by liquid TP1 should be + 3VDC +/- 100mV.
If not adjust trimmer VR2, then repeat step a.
7.6.1.3
Test points of ISE Main pcb
TP 1:
TP 2:
TP 3:
TP 4:
TP 5:
Electric potential of the Na electrode. Equivalent to the TP 1 on the preamplifier board.
Electric potential of the K electrode. Equivalent to the
TP 2 on the preamplifier board.
Electric potential of the Cl electrode. Equivalent to the TP 3 on the preamplifierÄ board.
Electric potential of the ref. electrode. Equivalent to the TP 7 on the preamplifier board.
Output of the electric potential of the Na electrode subtracted by the electric potential of the reference
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
electrode amplified by 20 times
TP 6: Output of the electric potential of the K electrode subtracted by the electric potential of the reference electrode amplified by 20 times
TP 7: Output of the electric potential of the Cl electrodesubtracted by the electric potential of the reference electrode” amplified by 20 times
TP 8: Output from the calibrator liquid sensor. Equivalent to the
TP1 on the Liquid sensor 1 PCB ASSY.
TP 9: Output from the diluent liquid sensor. Equivalent to the TP
2 on the Liquid sensor 1 PCB ASSY.
TP 10: Output from the Ref solution liquid sensor. Equivalent to the TP 3 on the Liquid sensor 1 PCB ASSY.
TP 11: Output from the slope solution liquid sensor. Equivalent to the TP 1 on the Liquid sensor 2 PCB ASSY.
TP 12: +5 VDC power supply for the digital circuit
TP 13: Digital ground (+5 VDC ground)
TP 14: +24 VDC power supply for driving motors and
solenoid valves
TP 15: Power ground (+24 VDC ground)
TP 16: +15 VDC power supply for the analog circuit
TP 17: Analog ground (+ 15 VDC ground)
TP 18: -15 VDC power supply for the analog circuit
TP 19: +12 VDC power supply for the current loop
TP 20: V/F converter output
TP 21: CPU reset output H while the CPU is reset
TP 22: CPU reset input The CPU is reset while the input is L.
TP 23: CPU clock: 4 MHz at the TTL level
7.6.1.4
Test points of Liquid sensor 1 pcb
TP 1: Output from the liquid seasor inside the piping for the
calibrator
TP 2: Output from the liquid sensor inside the piping for the diluent
TP 3: Output from the liquid sensor inside the piping for the
reference solution
TP 4: Analog ground
7.6.1.5
Test points of Liquid sensor 2 pcb
TP 1: Output from the liquid sensor inside the piping for the slope
solution
Instrumentation Laboratory
7.31
ISE Module
TP 2: Analog ground
7.6.1.6
Test points of Preamplifier pcb
TP 1: Electric potential of the sodium (Na) electrode
TP 2: Electric potential of the potassium (K) electrode
TP 3: Electric potential of the chloride (Cl) electrode
TP 4: Output equivalent to ”the electric potential of the Na electrode subtracted by the electric potential of the reference electrode amplified by 20 times
TP 5: Output equivalent to ”the electric potential of the K electrode subtracted by the electric potential of the reference electrode” amplified by 20 times
TP 6: Output equivalent to ”the electric potential of the Cl electrode subtracted by the electric potential of the reference electrode amplified by times
TP 7: Electric potential of the reference electrode
TP 8: Analog ground
7.6.1.7
Bottle level sensors checkout and adjustment
Figure 7.18 - Bottle sensors
ISE RG T bottle
Trim m e r
7.32
M e tal plate
B o ttle s e n s o r
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
The ISE module is provided of three level sensor for the detection of liquid in ISE Diluent , ISE Reference Solution and
ISE Calibrator bottles. The sensor detects whenever the actual liquid level is higher or lower than a set level, and triggers a reference signal for monitoring the ISE bottles status in the reagent map.
The operation checkout and the adjustment of each sensor can be performed as follows (note: the ILab system is turned ON and is in
Ready status): a. Remove the complete tray that hold the ISE RGT bottles.
b. Fill an empty bottle with the set volume 1 (125 or 250ml) of distilled water as indicated in table below. Place the bottle on the tray, place the metal plate in its housing and verify that the status of the bottle level sensor.
Note: if the metal plate is not properly in place the bottle level sensor cannot detect any presence of liquid in the bottle.
Note: The status of the bottle level sensor is monitored by an
LED located on the sensor itself as follows: as sensor is detecting liquid led is ON as sensor is detecting air led is OFF
Note: Make sure that the tray with the ISE RGT bottle is flat with the floor.
c. The LED of the liquid sensor should be ON. The adjustment of the sensor can be performed by turning the sensor trimmer until the LED is switched OFF, then carefully turn again the trimmer to LED and setting the position of the trimmer where the LED has just switched from OFF to ON.
d. Drain the bottle and fill with the set volume 2 (75 or 150ml) of distilled water as indicated in table below. Verify that at this time the sensor LED is OFF. If not repeat step c.
H2O dist. Volume 1
H2O dist. Volume 2
Cal & Ref Sol bottles
125 ml
75 ml
Diluent bottle
250 ml
150 ml
7.6.2
Mechanical check-out and alignments
7.6.2.1
Vertical alignment of ISE sample probe module
The vertical alignment of the ISE sample probe should be checked and performed with the ILab600 system turned ON.
Instrumentation Laboratory
7.33
ISE Module
a. Enter in the ISE diagnostic program. Set the vertical position of the ISE sample probe to MIDDLE.
b. Set the rotational probe arm to FREE. Manually rotate the probe to the Dilution pot.
c. Check that the tip of the sample probe be flush with the top border of the Detergent pot.
Figure 7.19 - ISE sample probe
End of Sample probe must be flush with the top of dilution pot
Sample probe
Dilution pot d. If not adjust the height of the arm by loosening the fixing screws of the arm and setting the vertical screw and counternut
Fig 7.20 - ISE spl probe arm
S c r e w B
C o u n t e r n u t
S c r e w A
7.34
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Note: After the vertical alignment has been changed, check that during the operation the rotational position has not been misaligned. By the service program move the rotational position of the probe arm to the Calibration pot, then set the vertical operation to FREE. Manually push the probe into the
Calibration pot If the probe is not centered into the Calibration pot loosen again the fixing screw and align horizontally the probe as required.
7.6.2.2
Magnetization pattern alignment (electronic home)
Set magnetization pattern as follows: a. Set Dip Switch SW3 of the ISE Main CPU pcb as follows: bit 1 OFF bit 2 to 6 ON bit 7 ON b. change position of bit 8 to start the procedure.
After a short mechanical inizialization, check status of LEDs
D4 to D11. Should any LED be flashing, set corresponding bits 2, 3 and 4 of Dip Switch SW 2 until all LEDs are OFF.
c. Repeat a few more times the magnetization pattern (step b.) and verify that LEDs are constantly all OFF.
d. Return to Routine mode by setting all bits of Dip Switch SW3
OFF. Enter in the diagnostic program and Reset the ISE module.
7.6.3
Further checkouts
7.6.3.1
Electrode typical offset
Electrodes performances can be evaluated by checking the mV offset.
Here below are reported the typical mV offset of internal calibration considering a calculated Coefficient Factor = 1.
Typical electrode offset on calibration with C.F. = 1
High cal
Low cal
Difference
Note: unit is mV
Na
3.26
-1.66
4.92
K
8.60
-1.66
10.26
Cl
113.31
119.97
-6.66
Instrumentation Laboratory
7.35
ISE Module
7.6.3.1
Cleaning the mixer
The ISE module is equipped by two mixers: the first is located at the side of the tray of Diluent/calibration pots (see fig 22), the second is located in the electrode box (see fig. 21).
If required, mixer may be cleaned as follows: a. Remove the mixer from the system (two screws) b. Remove the metal plate
Figure 7.21 - ISE mixer 2
M ix e r
P o ly u re th a n e s t r ip
Te flo n s t r ip
M ix e r
D e ta il
M e ta l p la te
P la x ig la s s b lo c h
E le c tro d e b o x
( s id e v ie w )
E le c tro d e b o x
(fro n t v i e w ) c. Clean carefully the mixer fluidic path with detergent solution.
Rinse with distilled water d. Remove and discard the old polyurethane strip and the teflon strip. Install new polyurethane and teflon strips e. Install the metal plate. Do not overtighten the six fixing screws.
Screws should be tightened with the same strenght.
f. Replace the mixer in its housing.
Note: The polyurethane and teflon strips should be replaced with new ones any time that the metal plate is removed.
Note: cleaning procere is the same for both the mixers
7.36
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 7.22 - ISE mixer 1
Mixer
ILab600 Service Manual
Instrumentation Laboratory
7.37
ILab600 Service Manual
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Error Dictonary
Any ILab600 system hardware and software operation is monitored by dedicated system integrity check.
If any error is detected, specific alarm is generated and reported by the ILab600.
Whenever an error is reported, the system beeps intermittently, and a red arrow is shown besides the ! (exclamation mark) icon.
Error message is coded as follows:
- error code (numeric): is a six digit code, the first (from left) two digit indicate the area or module of the error, as follows:
01: Photometer/cuvette tray
02: Sample tray/sample dispenser
03: Reagent tray/reagent 1 dispenser
04: Reagent 2 dispenser/sample cup stirrer
05: Cuvette stirrer/cuvette rinse
09: ISE
0a: Other
Complete error dictionary is reported in next pages
8.1
Instrumentation Laboratory
000102 07
000102 08
000102 09
000103 01
000103 02
000103 03
000103 04
000103 05
000103 06
000103 07
000103 08
000103 09
000110 01
000110 02
000110 03
000110 04
000120 01
000120 02
000120 03
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
000101 01 Command cannot be executed
000101 02 Command cannot be executed
000101 03
000101 04
000101 05
000101 06
Command cannot be executed
Command cannot be executed
Command cannot be executed
Command cannot be executed
000101 07
000101 08
000101 09
000102 01
000102 02
000102 03
000102 04
000102 05
000102 06
Command cannot be executed
Command cannot be executed
Command cannot be executed
Failure executing command
Failure executing command
Failure executing command
Failure executing command
Failure executing command
Failure executing command
Failure executing command
Failure executing command
Failure executing command
Time-out executing command
Time-out executing command
Time-out executing command
Time-out executing command
Time-out executing command
Time-out executing command
Time-out executing command
Time-out executing command
Time-out executing command
No buffer space
No buffer space
No buffer space
No buffer space
ROM card access abnormal (except for routine)
ROM card access abnormal (except for routine)
ROM card access abnormal (except for routine)
000120 04
000120 05
000120 06
000120 07
000120 08
000120 09
000121 00
000121 01
000121 02
000121 03
000121 04
000121 05
ROM card access abnormal (except for routine)
ROM card access abnormal (except for routine)
ROM card access abnormal (except for routine)
ROM card access abnormal (except for routine)
ROM card access abnormal (except for routine)
ROM card access abnormal (except for routine)
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
Location of the problem photometer, cuvette tray sample tray, sample dispenser
RGT tray, R1 dispenser
R2 dispenser, SPL cup stirrer cuvette stirrer, cuvette wash.
PID
RID
Timer
ISE photometer, cuvette tray sample tray, sample dispenser
RGT tray, R1 dispenser
R2 dispenser, SPL cup stirrer cuvette stirrer, cuvette wash.
PID
RID
Timer
ISE photometer, cuvette tray sample tray, sample dispenser
RGT tray, R1 dispenser
R2 dispenser, SPL cup stirrer cuvette stirrer, cuvette wash.
PID
RID
Timer
ISE work sheet cannot be received data cannot be stored
ISE data cannot be stored error info cannot be stored no ROM card
Write protected
Write voltage error
Erase error
Write error
Time out
No data
Data size error
Not erased
Pure water tank empty
Pure water pressure switch
Degasser vacuum pressure SW
Vacuum tank level SW
Vacuum tank pressure SW
Drain tank full
Note
Timing mismatch between modules-SW conflict
Timing mismatch between modules-SW conflict
Timing mismatch between modules-SW conflict
Timing mismatch between modules-SW conflict
Timing mismatch between modules-SW conflict
Timing mismatch between modules-SW conflict
Timing mismatch between modules-SW conflict
Timing mismatch between modules-SW conflict
Timing mismatch between modules-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
Abnormal data transmission-SW conflict
PC sent a work-list without confirming the data buffer space
PC not sending data-request
PC not sending ISE data-request
PC not sending error-request
ROM card is ejected
ROM card is write-protected
ROM card malfunction
ROM card malfunction
ROM card malfunction
ROM card malfunction no data written in ROM card
Read/write size is incorrect
ROM card is not erased
000121 15
000122 00
000122 01
000122 02
000122 03
000122 04
000122 05
000122
000122
000122
000122
000122
000122
000122
000122
000122
000122
000122
000123 00
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
000121 06 Sensor error
000121 07 Sensor error
000121 08
000121 09
000121 0A
000121 0B
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
000121 0C
000121 0D
000121 0E
000121 0F
000121 10
000121 11
000121 12
000121 13
000121 14
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
Sensor error
01
02
03
04
05
10
11
12
13
14
15
Sensor error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C reading error
RS232C writing error
000123 01
000123 02
000123 03
000123 04
000123 05
000123
000123
000123
000123
000123
000123
000123
01
02
03
04
05
10
11
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
Location of the problem
Reservoir water level
Cooling compartment power
5 VDC power source
ISE 5 VDC power source
ISE 24 VDC power source
Lamp voltage
24 VDC-A voltage
24 VDC-B voltage
-15 VDC-B voltage
+15 VDC-B voltage
+5 VDC-A voltage
-15 VDC-A voltage
+15 VDC-A voltage
Main CPU +/-12 VDC
Unit CPU-A 5VDC
Unit CPU-B 5VDC
PC connection line
Debugging use only
PID module connection line
RID module connection line
Timer module connection line
ISE module connection line
Parity error
Over-run error
Framing error
Break detected
Pending error (IRQ missing)
Internal check-sum error
Check-sum error
No data
Size over
Time out
Unit busy
PC connection line
Debugging use only
PID module connection line
RID module connection line
Timer module connection line
ISE module connection line
Parity error
Over-run error
Framing error
Break detected
Pending error (IRQ missing)
Internal check-sum error
Check-sum error
Note power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure power supply or fuse failure
PC-Ilab Connection failure
Transmission parameter mismatch
Transmission parameter mismatch
Transmission parameter mismatch
Transmission parameter mismatch
Transmission parameter mismatch
Transmission parameter mismatch
Transmission parameter mismatch
Transmission parameter mismatch
Transmission parameter mismatch
Transmission parameter mismatch
Transmission parameter mismatch
Transmission parameter mismatch
Unit malfunction (timing error)
PC-Ilab Connection failure
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
000123 12 RS232C writing error
000123 13 RS232C writing error
000123
000123
000130
000131
14
15
RS232C writing error
RS232C writing error
Pure water tank drain abnormal
Pure water tank supply abnormal
000132
000133
000134 00
000134 01
000134 02
Incubator water drain abnormal
Incubator water supply abnormal
Incubator temperature abnormal
Incubator temperature abnormal
Incubator temperature abnormal
000135
000140
Incubator water level problem (low)
Target volume is insufficient (except for analysis period)
2. Errors common to all the slave CPUs
First two digits (from left) of Error Code indicate the CPU generatig the error as follows:
01: Photometer/Cuvette tray
02: Sample tray/Sample dispenser
03: Reagent tray/Reagent 1 dispenser
04: Reagent 2 dispenser/Sample cup stirrer
05: Cuvette stirrer/Cuvette rinse
2.1 List of warnings
010001
010003
010004
Target volume is insufficient
Received another command while waiting for "Reset" command
Interrupt Problem
010006
010007
010008
010009
01000a
Command abnormal
Parameter abnormal
Level sensor problem (level detection problem)
Level sensor problem (liquid section problem)
Level detection time is out of range (too early)
Level sensor triggered while reading down-limit 01000b
2.2 List of errors
010102
010106
010107
S-format check-sum problem (while downloading S/W from Main CPU)
MPU extra RAM access problem (during starting up)
MPU RAM access problem (during starting up)
010108 OP code problem
3. Photometer/Cuvette tray errors
010127 Pulse pattern problem (pulse motor) (while initializing)
010128 Reaction disk can not be rotated
010129
01012a
01012c
01012f
010130
010150
010152
010153
Reaction disk cannot move from initial position
Reaction disk cannot find the original position
Reaction disk error ; sensor 2 problem while rotating
Fuse broken : FS6(24V)
Lamp problem
Reaction disk error ; sensor 2 problem while rotating
Reaction disk rotation error ; sample probe in down position (analyzing)
Location of the problem
No data
Size over
Time out
Unit busy
Pure water tank-drain line
Pure water supply line
Temperature low
Temperature high
Temperature overheat (>40°C)
Incubator
Sample or RGT missing
Note
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Interconnection problem
Sample or RGT missing
S/W Problem
S/W Problem
S/W Problem
S/W Problem
Check for probe bent/dirty
Bubbles on the surface
Bottle setup is incorrect (Bottle shape is wrong)
H/W problem (ROM program was not copied correctly to RAM)
H/W problem
H/W problem
S/W Problem
Fuse broken
Lamp disconnected
Sensor problem
Problem with vertical movement of sample probe while up/down
020129
02012a
02012b
02012c
02012d
02012e
02012f
020130
020131
020108
020120
020121
020122
020123
020124
020125
020126
020127
020128
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
010154 Reaction disk rotation error ; Reagent 2 probe in down position (analyzing)
010155 Reaction disk rotation error ; Reagent 1 probe in down position (analyzing)
010156
010157
010158
010159
Reaction disk rotation error ; sample probe in down position (other time)
Reaction disk rotation error ; Reagent 2 probe in down position (other time)
Reaction disk rotation error ; Reagent 1 probe in down position (other time)
Location of the problem Note
Problem with vertical movement of Reagent 2 probe while up/down
Problem with vertical movement of Reagent 1 probe while up/down
Problem with vertical movement of sample probe while up/down
Problem with vertical movement of Reagent 2 probe while up/down
Problem with vertical movement of Reagent 1 probe while up/down
01015a
01015b
Analyzing module failure
Measuring unit cannot attain "Ready" status while initializing
010180to83 Photometer/Reaction disk : time-out
4. Sample tray/sample dispenser
4.1 List of warnings
020001
020003
020004
020006
Pre-amplifier problem
Pre-amplifier problem
S/W Problem
Sample tray/sample probe : Target volume insufficient Sample is short
Sample tray/sample probe : received another command while waiting for "Reset" commandS/W Problem
Sample tray/sample probe : Interrupt problem
Sample tray/sample probe : Command problem
S/W Problem
S/W Problem
S/W Problem 020007
020008
020009
02000a
02000b
4.2 List of errors
020102
020106
020107
Sample tray/sample probe : Parameter problem
Sample tray/sample probe : Level sensor problem (level detection problem)
Sample tray/sample probe : Level sensor problem (liquid section problem)
Sample tray/sample probe : Level detection time is out of range (too early)
Sample tray/sample probe : Level sensor triggered while reading down-limit
Sample tray/sample probe : MPU extra RAM access problem (during starting up)
Sample tray/sample probe : MPU RAM access problem (during starting up)
Sample tray/sample probe : OP code problem
During reset cycle, sample probe cannot reach the top position
During reset cycle, sample probe cannot go down from the top position
During reset cycle, sample dispensor cannot find the orginal position
During reset cycle, sample probe cannot move from the inital position
H/W problem
H/W problem
S/W Problem
Problem with vertical movement of up/down unit
Problem with vertical movement of up/down unit
During reset cycle, sample probe cannot find the pulse pattern set by dip SW
During reset cycle, sample syringe cannot reach the top position
During reset cycle, sample syringe cannot move from the initial position
During reset cycle, Sample tray cannot find the orginal position
During reset cycle, Sample tray cannot move from the initial position
During reset cycle, Sample tray cannot stop at the correct position
At cell position, sample probe cannot reach the top position
At rinsing well, sample probe cannot reach the top position
At detergent position, sample probe cannot reach the top position
Dip SW is not set up yet
Sensor problem
020132
020133
020134
At outer sample position, sample probe cannot reach the top position
At middle sample position, sample probe cannot reach the top position
At inner sample position, sample probe cannot reach the top position
At cell position, sample probe cannot move from the top position
At rinsing well, sample probe cannot move from the top position
At detergent position, sample probe cannot move from the top position
At outer sample position, sample probe cannot move from the top position
At middle sample position, sample probe cannot move from the top position
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
020135 At inner sample position, sample probe cannot move from the top position
020136 Probe shock sensor triggered (at cell position)
020137
020138
020139
02013a
Probe shock sensor triggered (at rinsing pot position)
Probe shock sensor triggered (at detergent position)
Probe shock sensor triggered (at outer sample position)
Probe shock sensor triggered (at middle sample position)
02013b
02013c
02013d
02013e
02013f
020140
020141
020142
020143
Probe shock sensor triggered (at inner sample position)
Probe cannot rotate to the position (at cell position)
Probe cannot rotate to the position (at rinsing pot position)
Probe cannot rotate to the position (at detegent position)
Probe cannot rotate to the position (at outer sample position)
Probe cannot rotate to the position (at middle sample position)
Probe cannot rotate to the position (at inner sample position)
Sample syringe cannot reach the top position
Sample syringe cannot move from the top position
020144
020145
020146
020147
020148
020149
02014a
02014b
02014c
02014d
02014e
02014f
020150
020151
020180 - 020196
Sample tray cannot stop correctly (for outer sample)
Sample tray cannot stop correctly (for middle sample)
Sample tray cannot stop correctly (for inner sample)
During reset cycle, sample level sensor voltage not within 0.5 and 4.5 Volts range
Probe shock sensor triggered at up position
At sample dispensing time, Sample tray continues rotating
Fuse broken : FS4(24V)
Fuse broken : FS1(24V)
When Sample tray starts rotating, ISE probe is still at down position
Probe cannot rotate because it is not at the top position
When Sample tray starts rotating, reagent 1 probe is still in the down position
When Sample tray starts rotating, sample stirrer is still in the down position
When sample probe starts rotating, Reagent 1 probe is still at the dispensing position
When Sample tray starts rotating, sample probe does not reach the top position
Sample tray/sample probe : time-out
5. Reagent tray/reagent 1 dispenser
5.1 List of warnings
030001
030003
030004
030006
030007
030008
030009
03000a
03000b
5.1 List of errors
030102
030106
030107
030108
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : Target volume insufficient
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : Interrupt problem
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : Command problem
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : Parameter problem
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : Level sensor problem (level detection problem)
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : Level sensor problem (liquid section problem)
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : Level detection time is out of range (too early)
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : Level sensor triggered while reading down-limit
Location of the problem
Reagent is short
S/W Problem
S/W Problem
S/W Problem
Reagent tray/RGT 1 probe : S-format check-sum problem (while downloading S/W from Main CPU)
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : MPU extra RAM access problem (during starting up)
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : MPU RAM access problem (during starting up)
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : OP code problem
Note
030142
030143
030144
030145
030146
030147
030148
030149
03014a
03014b
03014c
03014d
030138
030139
03013a
03013b
03013c
03013d
03013e
03013f
030140
030141
03012f
030130
030131
030132
030133
030134
030135
030136
030137
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
030120 During reset cycle, Reagent 1 probe cannot reach the top position
030121 During reset cycle, Reagent 1 probe cannot go down from the top position
030122
030123
030124
030125
During reset cycle, Reagent 1 probe cannot find the original position
During reset cycle, Reagent 1 probe cannot move from the initial position
During reset cycle, Reagent 1 probe cannot find the pulse pattern set by dip SW
During reset cycle, Reagent 1 syringe cannot reach the top position
030126
030127
030128
030129
03012a
03012b
03012c
03012d
03012e
During reset cycle, Reagent 1 syringe cannot move from the initial position
During reset cycle, Reagent tray cannot find the original position
During reset cycle, Reagent tray cannot move from the initial position
During reset cycle, Reagent tray cannot stop at the correct position
Reagent 1 probe cannot reach the top position (at rinsing pot position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot reach the top position (at detergent 1 position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot reach the top position (at detergent 2 position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot reach the top position (at Reagent tray outer position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot reach the top position (at Reagent tray inner position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot reach the top position (at Sample tray middle position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot move from the top position (at rinsing pot position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot move from the top position (at detergent 1 position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot move from the top position (at detergent 2 position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot move from the top position (at Reagent tray outer position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot move from the top position (at Reagent tray innrer position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot move from the top position (at Sample tray middle position)
Reagent 1 probe shock sensor triggered (at rinsing pot position)
Reagent 1 probe shock sensor triggered (at detergent 1 position)
Reagent 1 probe shock sensor triggered (at detergent 2 position)
Reagent 1 probe shock sensor triggered (at Reagent tray outer position)
Reagent 1 probe shock sensor triggered (at Reagent tray inner position)
Reagent 1 probe shock sensor triggered (at Sample tray middle position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot rotate to the position (at cell position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot rotate to the position (at incubator position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot rotate to the position (at rinsing pot position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot rotate to the position (at detergent 1 position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot rotate to the position (at detergent 2 position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot rotate to the position (at Reagent tray outer position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot rotate to the position (at Reagent tray inner position)
Reagent 1 probe cannot rotate to the position (at Sample tray middle position)
Reagent 1 syringe cannot reach the top position
Reagent 1 syringe cannot move from the top position
Reagent tray cannot stop correctly (for outer reagents)
Reagent tray cannot stop correctly (for inner reagents)
During reset cycle, reagent 1 level sensor voltage is not within 0.5 and 4.5 Volts range
Reagent 1 probe shock sensor triggered at up position
At Reagent 1 dispensing time, Reaction disk continues rotating
Fuse broken : FS8(24V)
Fuse broken : FS2(24V)
When Reagent tray starts rotating, reagent 2 probe is still at down position
Location of the problem Note
040128
040129
04012a
04012b
04012c
04012d
04012e
04012f
040130
040108
040120
040121
040122
040123
040124
040125
040126
040127
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
03014e Reagent 1 probe cannot rotate because it is not at the top position
03014f Reagent 1 probe cannot go down because Sample tray is still rotating
030150
030151
030180 - 03018f
Sample probe is still at the cell position when Reagent 1 probe starts rotating,
When Reagent tray starts rotating, reagent 2 probe does not reach the top position
Reagent tray/Reagent 1 probe : time-out
6. Reagent 2 dispenser/Sample cup stirrer
6.1 List of warnings
040001
040003
040004
040006
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : Target volume insufficient
Location of the problem
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : received another command while waiting for "Reset" command
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : Interrupt problem
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : Command problem
040007
040008
040009
04000a
04000b
4.2 List of errors
040102
040106
040107
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : Parameter problem
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : Level sensor problem (level detection problem)
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : Level sensor problem (liquid section problem)
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : Level detection time is out of range (too early)
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : Level sensor triggered while reading down-limit
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : S-format check-sum problem (while downloading S/W from Main CPU)
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : MPU extra RAM access problem (during starting up)
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : MPU RAM access problem (during starting up)
040131
040132
040133
040134
040135
040136
040137
040138
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : OP code problem
During reset cycle, Reagent 2 probe cannot reach the top position
During reset cycle, Reagent 2 probe cannot go down from the top position
During reset cycle, Reagent 2 probe cannot find the original position
During reset cycle, Reagent 2 probe cannot move from the initial position
During reset cycle, Reagent 2 probe cannot find the pulse pattern set by dip SW
During reset cycle, Reagent 2 syringe cannot reach the top position
During reset cycle, Reagent 2 syringe cannot move from the initial position
During reset cycle, sample stirrer cannot reach the top position
During reset cycle, sample stirrer cannot move from the top position
During reset cycle, sample stirrer probe cannot move from the top position
During reset cycle, sample stirrer probe cannot find the original position
Reagent 2 probe cannot reach the top position (at detergent for incubator position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot reach the top position (at rinsing pot position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot reach the top position (at detergent 1 position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot reach the top position (at detergent 2 position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot reach the top position (at Reagent tray outer position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot reach the top position (at Reagent tray inner position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot move from the top position (at detergent for incubator position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot move from the top position (at rinsing pot position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot move from the top position (at detergent 1 position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot move from the top position (at detergent 2 position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot move from the top position (at Reagent tray outer position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot move from the top position (at Reagent tray inner position)
Reagent 2 probe shock sensor triggered (at detergent for incubator position)
Reagent 2 probe shock sensor triggered (at rinsing pot position)
Note
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
040139 Reagent 2 probe shock sensor triggered (at detergent 1 position)
04013a Reagent 2 probe shock sensor triggered (at detergent 2 position)
04013b
04013c
04013d
04013e
Reagent 2 probe shock sensor triggered (at Reagent tray outer position)
Reagent 2 probe shock sensor triggered (at Reagent tray inner position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot rotate correctly (at detergent for incubator position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot rotate correctly (at cell position)
04013f
040140
040141
040142
040143
040144
040145
040146
040147
Reagent 2 probe cannot rotate correctly (at incubator position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot rotate correctly (at rinsing pot position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot rotate correctly (at detergent 1 position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot rotate correctly (at detergent 2 position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot rotate correctly (at Reagent tray outer position)
Reagent 2 probe cannot rotate correctly (at Reagent tray inner position)
Reagent 2 syringe cannot reach the top position
Reagent 2 syringe cannot move from the top position
Sample stirrer cannot reach the top position (at rinsing pot position)
040148
040149
04014a
04014b
04014c
04014d
04014e
04014f
040150
040151
040152
040153
040154
040155
040156
040157
040158
040159
04015a
040180 - 04018f
7.1 List of warnings
050001
050003
050004
050006
050007
050008
050009
05000a
05000b
7.2 List of errors
Sample stirrer cannot reach the top position (at detergent position)
Sample stirrer cannot reach the top position (at Sample tray outer position)
Sample stirrer cannot reach the top position (at Sample tray inner position)
Sample stirrer cannot move from the top position (at rinsing pot position)
Sample stirrer cannot move from the top position (at detergent position)
Sample stirrer cannot move from the top position (at Sample tray outer position)
Sample stirrer cannot move from the top position (at Sample tray inner position)
Sample stirrer cannot rotate correctly (at rinsing pot position)
Sample stirrer cannot rotate correctly (at detergent position)
Sample stirrer cannot rotate correctly (at Sample tray outer position)
Sample stirrer cannot rotate correctly (at Sample tray inner position)
During reset cycle, reagent 2 level sensor voltage is not within 0.5 and 4.5 Volts range
Reagent 2 probe shock sensor triggered at up position
At Reagent 2 dispensing time, reaction disk continues rotating
Fuse broken : FS9(24V)
Fuse broken : FS3(24V)
Reagent 2 probe cannot go down because Reagent tray continues rotating
Reagent 2 probe cannot rotate because it is not at the top position
Sample stirrer cannot go down because Sample tray is still rotating
Reagent 2 probe/Sample stirrer : time-out
Stirrer/Rinsing : Target volume insufficient
Stirrer/Rinsing : received another command while waiting for "Reset" command
Stirrer/Rinsing : Interrupt problem
Stirrer/Rinsing : Command problem
Stirrer/Rinsing : Parameter problem
Stirrer/Rinsing : Level sensor problem (level detection problem)
Stirrer/Rinsing : Level sensor problem (liquid section problem)
Stirrer/rinsing : Level detection time is out of range (too early)
Stirrer/Rinsing : Level sensor triggered while reading down-limit
Location of the problem Note
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
050102 Stirrer/Rinsing : S-format check-sum problem (while downloading S/W from Main CPU)
050106 Stirrer/Rinsing : MPU extra RAM access problem (during starting up)
050107
050108
050124
050125
Stirrer/Rinsing : MPU RAM access problem (during starting up)
Stirrer/Rinsing : OP code problem
During reset cycle, stirrer cannot reach the top position
During reset cycle, stirrer cannot move from the top position
050126
050127
050128
050129
05012a
05012c
05012d
05012e
05012f
During reset cycle, sensor continues to be inactive (light off)
During reset cycle, sensor continues to be active (light passed)
During reset cycle, pulse pattern problem
Passive sensor continues to be active (light passed)
After reset process, low position sensor is still inactive (light off)
During reset cycle, cuvette wash station assembly cannot go down
During reset cycle, cuvette wash station assembly cannot go up cuvette wash station assembly cannot go down cuvette wash station assembly cannot go up
050130
050131
050132
050133
050134
050135
050136
050137
050138
050139
050155
050156
050157
050158
050159
05015a
05015c
05015d
050180 - 0501d6 cuvette wash station assembly cannot find stirring position 1 cuvette wash station assembly cannot find stirring position 1/2
Stirrer cannot go up
Stirrer cannot go down
Stirrer rotation start position problem (at rinsing pot position)
Stirrer rotation start position problem (at stirring position 1)
Stirrer rotation start postion problem (at stirring position 1/2)
Stirrer cannot go down because reaction disk is rotating cuvette wash station assembly cannot go down because reaction disk is rotating
Stirrer cannot go down because it is not at top position cuvette wash station assembly cannot go down because it is not at top position
Location of the problem cuvette wash station assembly cannot go down because it is already detected at low position cuvette wash station assembly cannot go up because it is already detected at top position cuvette wash station assembly cannot go up because it is already at low position cuvette wash station assembly cannot go up from halfway because it is detected at top position cuvette wash station assembly cannot go up from halfway because it is detected at low position
Fuse broken : FS7(24V)
Fuse broken : FS10(24V)
Stirrer/Rinsing : time-out
8. Cuvette stirrer/cuvette rinse
8.1 List of errors
090101
090102
090103
090104
090105
090107
090108
090109
09010a
09010b
ISE RS232C data error : character after ESC is not 07H nor 0BH
ISE RS232C data error : number of data is less than 3
ISE RS232C data error : BCC error
ISE RS232C data error : overrun error
ISE RS232C data error : framing error
ISE A/D conversion time over : Na
ISE A/D conversion time over : K
ISE A/D conversion time over : Cl
ISE A/D conversion time over : REF
ISE A/D conversion time over : reagent 1 sensor
Note
090134
090135
090136
090137
090138
090139
09013a
09013b
09013c
09013d
09013e
09013f
09012a
09012b
09012c
09012d
09012e
09012f
090130
090131
090132
090133
090121
090122
090123
090124
090125
090126
090127
090128
090129
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
09010c ISE A/D conversion time over : reagent 2 sensor
09010d ISE A/D conversion time over : reagent 3 sensor
09010e
09010f
090110
090111
ISE A/D conversion time over : reagent 4 sensor
ISE A/D conversion time over : GND
ISE A/D over range (>full scale +5%) : Na
ISE A/D over range (>full scale +5%) : K
090112
090113
090114
090115
090116
090117
090118
09011f
090120
ISE A/D over range (>full scale +5%) : Cl
ISE A/D over range (>full scale +5%) : REF
ISE A/D over range (>full scale +5%) : reagent 1 sensor
ISE A/D over range (>full scale +5%) : reagent 2 sensor
ISE A/D over range (>full scale +5%) : reagent 3 sensor
ISE A/D over range (>full scale +5%) : reagent 4 sensor
ISE A/D over range (>full scale +5%) : GND
ISE probe error : during rotation, top position sensor became active(open)
Location of the problem
ISE probe rotation error : During reset cycle, horizontal position sensor continued active more than 40 pulses
ISE probe rotation error : During reset cycle, backrush is more than 5 pulses
ISE probe rotation error : During reset cycle, horizontal position sensor continued inactive(close) more than 328 pulses
ISE probe rotation error : During reset cycle, more than 8 sectors were detected
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from slope position to injection pot
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor in inactive (at injection pot from slope position)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from injection pot to waste position
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at drain position from injection pot)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from waste position to rinse pot position
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at rinse pot from waste position)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from rinse pot to pure water position
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at pure water position from rinse pot)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from pure water position to Sample tray inner position
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at Sample tray inner position from pure water position)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from Sample tray inner to mid position
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at Sample tray mid position from Sample tray inner position)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from Sample tray mid to outer position
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor in inactive (at Sample tray outer position from Sample tray mid position)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from Sample tray outer to mid position
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at Sample tray mid position from Sample tray outer position)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from Sample tray mid to inner position
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at Sample tray inner position from Sample tray mid position)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from Sample tray inner position to pure water position
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at pure water position from Sample tray inner position)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from pure water position to rinse pot
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at rinse pot from pure water position)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from rinse pot to waste position)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at waste position from rinse pot)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from waste position to injection pot
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at injection pot from waste position)
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor became active on the way from injection pot to slope pot
ISE probe rotation error : horizontal sensor is inactive (at slope pot from injection pot)
Note
090162
090163
090164
090165
090166
090167
090168
090169
09016a
09016b
09016c
09016d
090158
090159
09015a
09015b
09015c
09015d
09015e
09015f
090160
090161
09014f
090150
090151
090152
090153
090154
090155
090156
090157
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
090140
Location of the problem
ISE probe up/down error : During reset cycle, top position sensor continued active more than 1640 pulses
090141 ISE probe up/down error : During reset cycle, top position sensor continued inactive more than 80 pulses
090142
090143
090144
090145
ISE probe up/down error : During reset cycle, backrush exceeds more than 20 pulses
ISE probe up/down error : horizontal sensor became inactive during up/down
ISE probe up error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at slope pot
ISE probe up error : probe cannot reach the top position at slope pot (< +-1mm)
090146
090147
090148
090149
09014a
09014b
09014c
09014d
09014e
ISE probe up error : top sensor became active incorrectly at slope pot
ISE probe down error : top sensor became active incorrectly at slope pot
ISE probe down error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at slope pot
ISE probe up error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at injection pot
ISE probe up error : probe cannot reach the top position at injection pot
ISE probe up error : top sensor became active incorrectly at injection pot
ISE probe down error : top sensor became active incorrectly at injection pot
ISE probe down error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at injection pot
ISE probe up error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at waste position
ISE probe up error : probe cannot reach the top position at waste position
ISE probe up error : top sensor became active incorrectly at waste position
ISE probe down error : top sensor became active incorrectly at waste position
ISE probe down error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at waste position
ISE probe up error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at rinse pot
ISE probe up error : probe cannot reach the top position at rinse pot
ISE probe up error : top sensor became active incorrectly at rinse pot
ISE probe down error : top sensor became active incorrectly at rinse pot
ISE probe down error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at rinse pot
ISE probe up error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at pure water position
ISE probe up error : probe cannot reach the top position at pure water position
ISE probe up error : top sensor became active incorrectly at pure water position
ISE probe down error : top sensor became active incorrectly at pure water position
ISE probe down error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at pure water position
ISE probe up error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at Sample tray inner position
ISE probe up error : probe cannot reach the top position at Sample tray inner position
ISE probe up error : top sensor became active incorrectly at Sample tray inner position
ISE probe down error : top sensor became active incorrectly at Sample tray inner position
ISE probe down error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at Sample tray inner position
ISE probe up error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at Sample tray middle position
ISE probe up error : probe cannot reach the top position at Sample tray middle position
ISE probe up error : top sensor became active incorrectly at Sample tray middle position
ISE probe down error : top sensor became active incorrectly at Sample tray middle position
ISE probe down error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at Sample tray middle position
ISE probe up error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at Sample tray outer position
ISE probe up error : probe cannot reach the top position at Sample tray outer position
ISE probe up error : top sensor became active incorrectly at Sample tray outer position
ISE probe down error : top sensor became active incorrectly at Sample tray outer position
ISE probe down error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly at Sample tray outer position
ISE probe shock sensor triggered
ISE probe cannot detect low dead end position
Note
Error Code Parameter1Parameter2Error description
090170
Location of the problem
ISE triple syringe pump error : During reset cycle, syringe cannot reach the top position within 3600 pulses
090171 ISE triple syringe pump error : During reset cycle, top position sensor continued inactive more than 500 pulses
090172
090173
090174
090175
ISE triple syringe pump error : During reset cycle, backrush exceeded 100 pulses
ISE triple syringe pump up error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly
ISE triple syringe pump up error : syringe cannot reach the top position (< +-1mm)
ISE triple syringe pump up error : top sensor became active incorrectly
090176
090177
090180
090181
090182
090183
090184
090185
090186
090187
090190
0901c0
0a0001
0a0101
0a0102
0a0103
0a0160
ISE triple syringe pump down error : top sensor became active incorrectly
ISE triple syringe pump down error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly
ISE cal syringe pump error : During reset cycle, syringe cannot reach the top position within 2156 pulses
ISE cal syringe pump error : During reset cycle, top position sensor continued inactive more than 395 pulses
ISE cal syringe pump error : During reset cycle, backrush exceeded 60 pulses
ISE cal syringe pump up error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly
ISE cal syringe pump up error : syringe cannot reach the top position (< +-1mm)
ISE cal syringe pump up error : top sensor became active incorrectly
ISE cal syringe pump down error : top sensor became active incorrectly
ISE cal syringe pump down error : top sensor became inactive incorrectly
ISE time-out error : probe waited for sampling ready more than 3 seconds
ISE shock sensor triggered at sampling : Sample volume insufficient
9. Other errors
Some cells are unavailable because of "Water Blank Error"
PC :Failure sending worklist
PC : command to start analyzing was not accepted
PC : Failure sending parameters
PC : next command-transfer
Note
ILab600 Service Manual
9 Parts (note: section obsolete)
9.1 Spare parts list
No IL P/N Shimadzu P/N Description
1 18470000 0322247220 Belt,B100-S3M-225:
2 18470010 0356156431 Hose Nipple,VFM6106:
3 18470020 0356156432 Hose Nipple,VFM6206:
4 18470030 0426093512 Medium,FL8 (fan filter):
5 18470040 0720166500 Fuse,3266.25:
6 18470050 0720166528 Fuse,32603.2:
7 18470060 0720166531 Fuse,3266.25:
8 18470070 0720166534 Fuse,326010:
9 18470080 0720166536 Fuse,326 015:
10 18470090 0720200511 Fuse,2391.25:
11 18470100 0720201012 Fuse,237008:
12 18470110 0720564802 Fuse,OGN 0031-8201:
13 18470120 0748038201 Power,LWT-30H-522:
14 18470130 0748067812 Power,LDC15F-1:
15 18470140 0777990201 Dumper,FD035AS:
16 18470150 2046243503 Filter (10x10):
17 18470160 2046401623 Teflon tube Flare:
18 18470170 2064106206 Planger Assy,P:
19 18470180 2064106207 Planger Assy,R:
20 18470190 2064121600 Stirring rod Assy:
21 18470200 2064319200 Rapping tape:
22 18470210 2064320800 Thermistor Assy:
23 18470220 2064572702 Seal,Probe:
24 18470230 2064702400 Liquid Sensor Assy:
Instrumentation Laboratory
9.1
Parts
9.2
25 18470240 2064856001 Syringe Pump Assy
26 18470250 2064856002 Syringe Pump Assy
27 18470260 2410102500 Analyzing Unit Assy
28 18470270 2410115500 Tray Assy,Detergent
29 18470280 2410120000 Sampler Assy
30 18470290 2410120300 Moter Assy,Sample:
31 18470300 2410120900 Sensor Assy,Sample tray
32 18470310 2410124001 Sample tray
33 18470320 2410127500 Reagent Container Assy
34 18470330 2410127900 Fan Assy,Reagent Container
35 18470340 2410134000 Reagent tray
36 18470350 2410140000 Reaction Assy
37 18470360 2410140500 Moter Assy,Photometer:
38 18470370 2410141600 Photometer Assy:
39 18470380 2410146300 Liquid Sensor:
40 18470390 2410147000 Amplifier Unit Assy
41 18470400 2410152500 Reaction Bath Assy:
42 18470410 2410155000 Reaction Disk Assy:
43 18470420 2410155200 Holder Assy:
44 18470430 2410155500 Disk:
45 18470440 2410160000 Sample Dispenser Assy
46 18470450 2410160100 Reagent Dispenser 1 Assy
47 18470460 2410160200 Reagent Dispenser 2 Assy
48 18470470 2410161900 Pot Assy,Sample
49 18470480 2410162000 Pot Assy,RGT
50 18470490 2410165000 Sample probe Assy:
51 18470500 2410165100 Reagent probe Assy:
52 18470510 2410170000 Stirrer Assy
53 18470520 2410172100 Pot Assy,STR1
54 18470530 2410172200 Pot Assy,STR2
55 18470540 2410172300 Moter Assy,STR:
56 18470550 2410174500 Moter Assy 1:
57 18470560 2410174600 Moter Assy 2:
58 18470570 2410177900 Manifold Assy
59 18470580 2410180000 Tank Unit Assy
60 18470590 2410180500 Tank Assy
Instrumentation Laboratory
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
61 18470600 2410180600 Float-Switch Assy:
62 18470610 2410182500 Valve Assy,Pure Water
63 18470620 2410182900 Detergent Dilution Assy
64 18470630 2410183700 Poat Assy
65 18470640 2410183801 Tube Assy,Dilute:
66 18470650 2410183802 Tube Assy,Dilute:
67 18470660 2410184500 Pump Assy,Pure Water:
68 18470670 2410185600 Valve Assy,In & Out
69 18470680 2410186000 Degasser Unit Assy
70 18470690 2410186800 Switch Assy:
71 18470700 2410190000 Reservoir Assy
72 18470710 2410191100 Duct(A),Assy
73 18470720 2410191900 SA Reserver:
74 18470730 2410192000 Heater Assy:
75 18470740 2410195000 Drain Pot Assy
76 18470750 2410197400 Tank Unit Assy,Vacuum
77 18470760 2410197700 Level Sensor Assy:
78 18470770 2410198700 Vacuum Pump Assy:
79 18470780 2410207500 Rinse Assy
80 18470790 2410208100 Probe,Rinse Assy:
81 18470800 2410208700 Probe,Dry Assy:
82 18470810 2410209200 Drying tip:
83 18470820 2410280000 AC Power Box Assy
84 18470830 2410281000 Timer Box Assy
85 18470840 2410282000 SW Regulator
86 18470850 2410284000 Panel Assy,Interface
87 18470860 2410286000 DC Power Box Assy
88 18470870 2410290000 PCB Assy,AMP
89 18470880 2410290300 PCB Assy,photosensor:
90 18470890 2410290600 PCB Assy,SensorLQ
91 18470900 2410290900 PCB Assy,Conector Nozzel:
92 18470910 2410291200 PCB Assy,Conector Strrer:
93 18470920 2410291500 PCB Assy,Conector Pump:
94 18470940 2410291800 PCB Assy,Nozzle Sensor 2R
95 18470950 2410297400 Thermistor Assy:
96 18470960 2410297500 PCB Assy,DC Power
9.3
Parts
9.4
97 18470970 2410297800 PCB Assy,TEMP Cont.
98 18470980 2410298100 PCB Assy,SSR:
99 18470990 2410298400 PCB Assy,DC Branch
100 18471000 2410298700 PCB Assy,Panel I/F:
101 18471010 2410299500 PCB Assy,Timer
102 18471020 2410300000 Controller Assy
103 18471030 2410302500 PCB Assy,CPU Mother
104 18471040 2410302800 PCB Assy,CPU Main
105 18471050 2410303100 PCB Assy,CPU Slave A
106 18471060 2410303400 PCB Assy,CPU Slave B
107 18471070 2410305000 PCB Assy,Driver Mother
108 18471080 2410305300 PCB Assy,I/O Driver A
109 18471090 2410305600 PCB Assy,I/O Driver B
110 18471100 2410311000 Terminal Assy:
111 18471110 2410403100 Mixer Assy:
112 18471120 2410409200 Plunger Assy,SUS316:
113 18471130 2410415200 Probe Assy, ISE:
114 18471140 2410427500 PCB Assy,ISE MAIN:
115 18471150 2410427800 PCB Assy,ISE Preamp:
116 18471160 2410428200 PCB Assy,Reagent Sensor 2
117 18471170 2410428600 PCB Assy,Reagent Sensor 1
118 18471180 2410429000 PCB Assy,ISE Nozzle:
119 18471190 2410429300 PCB Assy,Shock Sensor:
120 18471200 2419002302 Tube Poaron,1.0x3.0:
121 18471210 2419002303 Tube Poaron,1.5x3.0:
122 18471220 2419002306 Tube Poaron,2.0x4.0:
123 18471230 2419352202 Valve,Glove A100,3/8:
124 18471240 2419352801 Valve,MCV-2V-M5FS:
125 18471250 2419353100 Degassed Module:
126 18471260 2419353204 Valve,USG2:
127 18471270 2419353300 Fan,D12C4H-25:
128 18471280 2419353400 Degassed Tank,CB74-410:
129 18471290 2419353500 Fan,109P1224H415:
130 18471300 2419354100 Valve,LFVA2430113H:
131 18471310 2419355000 Valve,C0260-86AT:
132 18471320 2419355100 Valve,C240-86AT:
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
133 18471330 2419355300 Thermo-cooler,OCE-30PX2:
134 18471340 2419402700 Cuvette Cell:
135 18471350 2419501000 Lamp,PG-64258/ME-MLP:
Instrumentation Laboratory
9.5
ILab600 Service Manual
10 Maintenance
10.1 Maintenance schedule
This section contains all the information and procedures required for performing the service preventive maintenance.
In order to maintain the ILab600 system in optimal conditions two service preventive maintenance visits per year are suggested.
Actions to be performed during the PM visit are indicated in table below:
Preventive Maintenance Summary
1. Cleaning Actions
1.1 Clean the external surface of stirrers, R1 &R2, sample and ISE probes
1.2 Clean internal surface of reagent probes, sample probe.
1.3 Clean rinse wells of stirrers, reagent probes, sample probe
1.4 Clean Cuvettes
1.5 Clean Incubator
1.6 Clean Cuvettes Cover
1.7 Clean Incubator level sensor
1.8 Clean Fan filters
1.9 Clean syringe and syringe manifold filters
1.10 Clean syringe plungers
1.11 Clean on-board cuvette detergent filters
1.12 Clean arm shaft of stirrers, sample and reagent probes, and lubricate
1.13 Clean water inlet filter
1.14 Clean ISE syringe plungers to remove salt deposits.
1.15 Clean ISE sample dilution pot to remove salt deposits.
1.17 Clean ISE sample fluidics
10.1
Instrumentation Laboratory
Maintenance
1.18 Clean waste tank level sensor
1.19 Clean window of Bar Code Reader
2. Replacement Actions
2.1 Replace sample and reagent 1 & 2 syringe seals
2.2 Replace High calibrator pot seal
2.3 Replace ISE syringe seal for: ISE Diluent, ISE Reference, ISE Calibrator and ISE
Sample syringes
2.4 Replace ISE probe seal
2.5 Replace ISE tubings (the following 2 tubings): a: tubing from dilution pot to mixer 1 b: tubing from mixer 1 to mixer 2
3. Checkouts, Alignments and Adjustments Actions
3.1 Check quality of deionized water supply.
3.2 Check water level in cuvettes during washing, adjust if required
3.3 Check water pressure, adjust if required
3.4 Check sample probe for damage, replace if necessary
3.5 Check the alignment of sample probe, reagent probes, stirrers, cuvette wash
probes and ISE probe
3.6 Set the Bottom Limit of the Sample Probe
3.7 Set the Bottom limit of the Reagent Probe
3.8 Check the photometer lamp, replace if necessary
3.9 Check electrodes, replace if necessary
3.10 Check cuvette drying tip, replace if necessary (it should be replaced one time/
year)
3.11 Check tubings of Cuvette Washing station, replace if necessary
4. Analytical Verifications
4.1 Run water blank. check results and reset Base Water Blank
4.2 Run ISE internal calibration
4.3 Run a precision test selecting indicatively 3-4 chemistries + ISE
4.4 Run some QC sample and verify the accuracy of the system
4.5 Verify the accuracy of the QC data stored in the ILab system
10.2
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
10.2 Cleaning solutions
Cleaning solution to be used during Preventive Maintenance are listed in table below; the concentration to be used is indicated at each specific Preventive Maintenance procedure.
Cleaning solution
Alkaline Detergent
Acid Detergent
Bath Additive
Cuvette Alkaline Detergent
Cuvette Acid Detergent
ISE Activator
Catalog Number
182537-10
182538-00
184694-00
184690-00
184691-00
182540-00
10.3 Maintenance procedures
NOTE: THE PROCEDURES REPORTED IN THIS
SECTION ARE SOMETIMES MISSING OF THE
RELEVANT FIGURE.
PLEASE REFER TO THE PROCEDURE
REPORTED IN THE ILab600 OPERATOR'S
MANUAL, THAT INCLUDES THE SAME
PROCEDURE, INCLUDING THE FIGURES.
Instrumentation Laboratory
10.1
ILab600 Service Manual
10.2 Cleaning solutions
Cleaning solution to be used during Preventive Maintenance are listed in table below; the concentration to be used is indicated at each specific Preventive Maintenance procedure.
Cleaning solution
Alkaline Detergent
Acid Detergent
Bath Additive
Cuvette Alkaline Detergent
Cuvette Acid Detergent
ISE Activator
Catalog Number
182537-10
182538-00
184694-00
184690-00
184691-00
182540-00
10.3 Maintenance procedures
10.3.1
Clean Surface of Probes and Stirrers
Cleaning External Surface of Stirrers
1. Open the H/W Maintenance menu and click on Stirrer to open the Stirrer screen.
2. In the Replace frame at the bottom of the screen, click on
Move for Replacement. This will free the rotational tension on the arm, and allow the operator to rotate the arm by hand to move it to a comfortable working position.
3. Wipe the stirrer paddle surface clean with a soft gauze or cotton swab soaked in a 2% Alkaline Detergent solution, rinse with gauze or cotton soaked in deionized water.
Note: improper or incomplete cleaning may result in crosscontamination.
4.
Click on Replacement Canceled to return the stirring paddle to the rinse cup position in the standby state.
Note: do NOT click on Replacement Complete since this will cause an update of the paddle replacement record.
5.
Close the Stirrer screen and H/W Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
Cleaning External Surface of Reagent Probes
1. Open the H/W Maintenance menu and click on R1 Probe or
Instrumentation Laboratory
10.3
Maintenance
10.4
R2 Probe to open the Reagent R1 or R2 screen.
2. In the Replace frame at the bottom of the screen, click on
Move for Replacement. This will free the rotational tension on the arm, and allow the operator to rotate the arm by hand to move it to a comfortable working position over the reagent tray.
3. Wipe the probe surface clean with a soft gauze or cotton swab soaked in a 2% Alkaline Detergent solution, rinse with gauze or cotton soaked in deionized water. If the probe cannot be properly cleaned, repeat the procedure using a 2%
Acid Detergent solution.
Note: incomplete or improper cleaning may result in crosscontamination.
4. Click on Replacement Canceled to return the probe to the rinse cup position in the standby state.
Note: do NOT click on Replacement Complete since this will cause an update of the reagent probe replacement record.
5. Close the R1 Probe or R2 Probe screen and H/W
Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
Cleaning External Surface of Sample Probe
While performing this work, wear gloves and protective goggles to prevent contamination with biohazardous materials.
1. Open the H/W Maintenance menu and click on Sample Probe to open the Sample Probe screen.
2. In the Replace frame at the bottom of the screen, click on
Move for Replacement. This will free the rotational tension on the arm and allow the operator to rotate the arm by hand to move it to a comfortable working position over the sample tray.
3. Wipe the sample probe surface clean with a soft gauze or cotton swab soaked in a 2% Alkaline Detergent solution, rinse with gauze or cotton soaked in deionized water.
Note: improper or incomplete cleaning may result in carryover between samples and sampling inaccuracy.
5. Click on Replacement Canceled to return the sample probe to the rinse cup position in the standby state.
Note: do NOT Click on Replacement Complete since this will cause an update of the sample probe replacement record.
6.
Close the Sample screen and H/W Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
Cleaning External Surface of ISE Probe
1. Open the ISE Maintenance menu and click on Probe to open the ISE Probe screen.
2. In the Replace frame at the bottom of the screen, click on
Move for Replacement. This will free the rotational tension on the arm and allow the operator to rotate the arm by hand to move it to a comfortable working position
3. Wipe the ISE sample probe surface clean with a soft gauze or cotton swab soaked in a 2% Alkaline Detergent solution, rinse with gauze or cotton soaked in deionized water.
Note: improper or incomplete cleaning may result in crosscontamination.
4. Click on Replacement Canceled to return the sample probe to the rinse cup position in the standby state.
Note: do NOT Click on Replacement Complete since this will cause an update of the sample probe replacement record.
5.
Close the Sample screen and ISE Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
10.3.2
Clean Internal Surface of Probes
The cleaning process for any of the probes involves the following steps:
1. Removing the probe.
2. Cleaning the probe. See procedure below
3. Reinstalling the probe.
4. Checking the probe’s liquid level sensor. For this procedure refer to Section 3.2.2.4
5. Check the alignment of the probe.
Cleaning Internal Surface of Reagent Probe
When a reagent probe is used for an extended period, a buildup of material will form in spite of the daily detergent rinsing. This buildup may increase carryover between reagents and affect dispensing accuracy. Perform the detergent rinse procedure at least once a month as shown below, or at the frequency required by the system workload.
1.
Use the 2% Alkaline Detergent solution.
2.
Remove probe
3. Install a syringe on the tubing side of the probe and aspirate detergent through the probe (refer to Figure 10.1). Immerse only the probe tip in the detergent (avoid immersing the probe body). If the detergent has reached the probe body,
Instrumentation Laboratory
10.5
Maintenance
wash it off with water and dry it carefully.
4. Allow detergent to remain inside the probe for about 30 minutes, renewing the detergent three or four times during that period by repeating the aspirating operation.
5. Replace the detergent with water and rinse by repeated aspiration and discharging. Rinse the probe with water to remove all traces of detergent.
6. If stubborn deposits remain, especially when carry-over is suspected, repeat the rinsing as shown in steps 3. to 5., using the acid detergent.
7. Install the probe and perform an automated probe rinse through the Startup screen.
Figure 10.1 - probe internal cleaning
10.6
Cleaning Internal Surface of Sample Probe
When the sample probe is used for an extended period, a buildup of material will form in spite of the daily detergent rinsing. This buildup may increase carry-over between samples and affect dispensing accuracy. Perform the detergent rinse procedure at least once a month as shown below, or as often as required by the system workload.
1.
Use the 2% Alkaline Detergent solution.
2.
Remove probe
3. Install a syringe on the tubing side of the probe and aspirate detergent solution through the probe (refer to Figure 10.1).
Immerse only the probe tip in the detergent (avoid immersing the probe body) and aspirate detergent through the probe. If detergent reaches the probe body, wash it of with water and dry it carefully.
4. Allow detergent to stand inside the probe for about 30 minutes, renewing the detergent three or four times during
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
that period by repeating the aspiration operation.
5. Replace the detergent with water and rinse by repeated aspiration and discharging. Rinse the probe with water to remove all traces of detergent.
6. Install the probe and perform an automated probe rinse through the Startup screen.
10.3.3
Clean the rinse wells
Although the rinse wells are cleaned to some extent during probe rinse in the Startup and Shutdown procedures, the periphery of the rinsing wells will need cleaning after a period of time. The wells should be cleaned with cotton swabs moistened with 2% Alkaline Detergent followed by water.
10.3.4
Clean the cuvettes
Once a month or whenever necessary, perform a visual inspection of the cuvettes for damage and proceed to clean them by following the steps below. Refer to the diagram in
Figure 10.2 for the location of the parts to be handled during this procedure.
Figure 10.2 - Cuvette tray location
Instrumentation Laboratory
10.7
Maintenance
1. Open H/W Maintenance and select Water.
2. Click on Drain Water Bath. This drains the water bath, allowing the removal of the cuvette ring without spilling water into the analyzer.
3. Loosen the screw which fixes the cuvette wash station.
Slightly lift and rotate the rinse probes to remove them from their position over the cuvettes. Remove the cuvette cover.
4. Loosen the cuvette ring fixing screw and remove the cuvette ring.
Note: be extremely careful not to spill water on the photometer side.
5. Immerse the cuvettes in a container filled with 2% Alkaline
Detergent solution for about one hour, then rub the inside of each cuvette with a cotton swab moistened with detergent. If the outside of the cuvettes is dirty, carefully clean the optical path area with cotton swabs moistened with detergent (Figure 10.3).
Note: do not clean cuvettes in an ultrasonic bath, since this may deform the cuvettes.
6. Thoroughly rinse the cuvette assembly with distilled water and carefully wipe dry the cuvette tray. Make sure to wipe all water off the timing fence behind the cuvettes around the perimeter of the cuvette ring. This area is important for the timing during the photometric measurements.
Figure 10.3 - Cuvette cleaning
10.8
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
7.
Place the cuvette ring back into place. Make sure the positioning pin of the cuvette ring is properly aligned with the positioning hole. Hand-tighten the cuvette ring fixing screw.
8.
Install the cuvette cover on the tray and put the cuvette wash station back into place.
9.
Close the H/W Maintenance screen. The incubator is refilled automatically and the Bath Additive is dispensed into the incubator.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
10.3.5
Clean the Incubator
If the incubator water is contaminated, the suspended particles will affect the photometric measurements. Therefore keeping the incubator clean is of key importance to the quality of the test results. This procedure should be performed while the cuvettes are being cleaned. Refer to the diagram on Figure 10.4.
Figure 10.4 - Incubator cleaning
Instrumentation Laboratory
1. Drain the incubator and remove the cuvette ring.
2. Wipe-off deposits inside the incubator and on the photometric window with a lint-free cloth moistened with 2% detergent.
Rinse the incubator with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled water. Carefully avoid scratching the photometric window. Remove the partition of the overflow unit by pulling it up and clean the partition and overflow unit as well.
3. Remove the filter by lifting out the O-ring, and remove all particles from the filter with the aid of tweezers. A clogged
10.9
Maintenance
filter will impair circulation and affect temperature uniformity.
4. When work is completed, reinstall the parts which have been removed, including the cuvette ring. Cuvettes must be cleaned as indicated in Section 10.3.4.
5. Close the H/W Maintenance screen.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
10.3.6
Clean the Cuvette Cover.
To clean the plastic cover that protects the cuvette ring, remove it and clean it with water or ethanol.
10.3.7
Clean the Incubator Level Sensor
The level sensor controlling the incubator water level is on the left hand side of the incubator. Any dirt deposits on the sensor electrodes will prevent proper detection. This procedure should be followed while the cuvette and the incubator are being cleaned. Refer to the diagram on Figure 10.5 to locate the position of the parts involved in the maintenance.
2. Click on the Drain Water Bath button.
Figure 10.5 - Water level sensor
10.10
3. Push the latch in the level sensor connectors and pull both connectors out.
4. The level sensor electrodes are located in the smaller connector. Check the electrodes for dirt. Clean them with a soft cloth or tissue moistened with 2% alkaline detergent.
Rinse the electrodes with a soft cloth or tissue moistened with distilled water. Be careful not to bend the electrodes. If the electrode tips show corrosion, replace the sensor.
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
5. Reinstall the sensor.
6. Close the HW Maintenance menu. The incubator is refilled automatically and the Bath Additive is dispensed into the incubator.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
10.3.8
Clean the Fan Filters
Cooling fan filters are found in several locations on the ILab 600, as shown in Figure 10.6:
1. Behind right front cover : 2 filters
2. Behind left front cover : 3 filters
3. Behind front top cover: 1 filter under the top louver, 1 filter under the middle louver
4. On right-hand side panel. This filter may be either a doorstyle (hinged) or a removable type:
Figure 10.6 - Filters location
Instrumentation Laboratory
To remove and clean the fan filters follow the steps below:
10.11
Maintenance
1. Turn power off. If filters are removed with power on, dust will enter the unit and cause damage.
2. Remove the filters by unhooking the retainer and vacuumclean the filter element.
3. Reinstall the filters.
10.3.9
Clean the Syringe and Syringe Manifold Filters
Cleaning the Syringe Filters
The filter located in the joint on top of the syringe pump is designed to retain bits of Teflon from the plunger seals. Refer to
Figure 10.7 when performing this cleaning procedure:
Figure 10.7 - Syringe filters
10.12
1. Open the H/W Maintenance menu.
2. Loosen the tube-fixing nut with your fingers and remove the tube.
3. Loosen and remove the joint with your fingers.
4. Insert a soft stick 1 to 2 mm in diameter (e.g. a toothpick) from the nut side of the joint to remove the filter and rinse it with water.
5. Reinsert the filter into the joint using the soft stick. During insertion, be careful not to damage the end of the filter.
6. Reassemble the joint and finger tighten the nut until the slack disappears, and then tighten a ¼ turn more. Do not overtighten since this will compress the O-ring between the joint and syringe barrel, resulting in poor dispensing accuracy.
7. Close the H/W Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
analyzing module.
8. Perform 10 Probe Rinsing repetitions using the <Startup> function and check for leakage.
Clean the Syringe Manifold Filter.
The filter located in the joint on top of the pump manifold is designed to prevent dust from entering the solenoid valve of the syringe pump. Refer to Figure 10.8 to clean the syringe manifold filter as follows:
Figure 10.8 - Manifold filters
Instrumentation Laboratory
1. From the H/W Maintenance menu, select Syringe to open the
Syringe screen.
2. Locate the Replace Syringe Seal area and choose the syringe to be replaced Sample Syringe / R1 Syringe / R2
Syringe, then click on Move to Replace. The syringe plunger can now be manually moved up and down.
3. The tubes connected to the sample, R1 and R2 syringes are routed from the manifold on the left side of the syringe pump.
Loosen the tube fixing nut by hand and slowly pull out the tube. If it is hard to pull out, wrap it with a piece of cloth, grab it gently with pliers and pull with a twisting motion.
Loosen and remove the joint with a wrench.
4. Insert a soft stick (e.g. a toothpick) from the nut side of the joint to remove the filter and rinse it with water.
5. Reinsert the filter into the joint using the soft stick. During insertion, take care not to damage the end of the filter.
6. Reassemble the joint, finger tighten the nut until slack disappears, and then tighten an additional ¼ turn.
Overtightening will compress the O-ring between the joint and the syringe barrel, resulting in poor dispensing accuracy.
7. Click on Replacement Canceled.
1. Close the H/W Maintenance menu.
10.13
Maintenance
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
9. Perform the probe water rinsing 10 times using <Startup> and check for leakage.
10.3.10
Replace syringe seals and clean plungers
Follow the instructions below and refer to Figure 10.9 in order to replace the syringe seals and clean the syringe plungers.
Figure 10.9 - Syringe
10.14
1. From the H/W Maintenance menu, select the Syringe button to open the Syringe screen.
2. Locate the Replace Seal area and choose the syringe to be replaced Sample Syringe / R1 Syringe / R2 Syringe, then click on Move to Replace. The syringe plunger can now be manually moved up and down.
3. Loosen the two plunger fixing nuts. Hold the upper fixing nut with pliers and loosen the lower nut with a wrench. After that, hold the plunger fixed portion with the pliers and loosen the upper fixing nut with the wrench.
4. Hold down the syringe drum by hand and turn the syringe drum fixing nut counterclockwise up to the top of the thread.
5. Slightly lower the syringe drum and pull it out toward you.
6. Remove the plunger. Water will spill, wipe it with a cloth. Be careful not to bend the plunger shaft (sliding portion) or damage its surface. If there are stains wipe them off with soft gauze.
7. Remove slotted set screw.
8. Remove seal and replace with a new one. Before installing the new packing, check the syringe drum and the new
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
packing for dirt.
9. Reinstall the plunger.
10.After installation check the plunger for parallelism to the syringe drum. Oblique installation will result in leaks at the seal. Move the plunger up and down about 20 times by hand to wet the seal. A little water on the plunger will speed up the wetting.
11.Click on Replacement Complete to update the replacement record.
12.From the Remove Air area enter 5 times . Click on Remove
Air After the reset operation, bubbles are removed from the syringe. Visually check that the bubbles are removed. If bubbles are still present repeat this step until they are completely gone.
Note: the reset operation and bubble removal operation take place simultaneously among the Sample, R1 and R2 dispensers, causing all 3 syringes to move up and down together, regardless of which seal has been replaced.
13.
Close the H/W Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
10.3.11
Clean On-Board Cuvette Cleaner Filters
When particles are found during replacement of the on-board cuvette cleaner bottles, debris in the detergent filter should be washed off .
The filter can be easily removed from the holder by pulling it with tweezers, and the filter can be washed with clean water.
Severely blocked filters should be replaced.
10.3.12
Clean and Lubricate Probe and Stirrer Shafts
The arm shafts of the stirrers and probes move repeatedly up and down and may stiffen in the course of time. Clean the arm shafts with a piece of gauze moistened with a Teflon-based lubricant.
10.3.13
Clean Water Inlet Filter.
A filter is fitted to the tube connected to the water inlet port at the rear of the unit. Refer to Figure 10.10 to perform the cleaning of the water inlet filter as follows:
1. Turn analyzer power OFF.
2. Turn OFF power to the water purifier so the water supply will
Instrumentation Laboratory
10.15
Maintenance
be shut off.
3. Disconnect the tube connected to the water supply port. Turn the safety ring (gray) counterclockwise to unlock and pull out the plastic joint at the end of the pipe.
4. Remove the filter and clean it. When the filter is removed, water present in the tubing will flow out; have a container ready to catch it.
5. Reinstall the filter and connect the tube to the water supply port, locking the plastic joint by turning the gray safety ring clockwise.
6. Turn power ON to the water purifier.
7. Turn power ON to the analyzer. Make sure there are no leaks.
Figure 10.10 - Pure water inlet filter
10.16
10.3.14
Clean the ISE Syringe Plungers
This procedure is necessary in order to remove the salt deposits from the ISE solutions that accumulate on the syringe plungers.
Refer to Figure 10.11 for a diagram of the ISE syringe area.
The ISE syringes are protected by a plastic cover that must be removed to gain access to the syringes. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the two screws that hold the cover to the module and remove the cover.
The following procedure must be done for the triple syringe (all
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
three plungers can be cleaned at once) and the Cal syringe plunger. From the ISE Maintenance menu select Syringe to open the ISE Syringe screen and click on the syringe/s to be cleaned
(Triple Syringe or CAL Syringe).
In the Vertical area select Down to move the plunger to the bottom position. Without removing the plunger, proceed to clean it thoroughly with a damp cloth soaked in distilled water. When finished, click on Up to move the plunger up and close the screen.
Figure 10.11 - ISE syringe modules
10.3.15
Clean the ISE Sample Dilution Pot
This procedure is necessary in order to remove the salt deposits from the ISE solutions that accumulate in the sample dilution pot.
Refer to Figure 10.12 for location of area to be cleaned.
The ISE probe must be moved away from the pot before proceeding with the cleaning. This is done from the ISE
Maintenance menu, selecting Probe to open the ISE Probe screen, and clicking on Tension off to release the tension on the probe arm. Once the ISE probe is free and can manually be moved from the position over the pot, remove the crystal deposits on and around the pot by pouring a small amount of
Instrumentation Laboratory
10.17
Maintenance
Figure 10.12 - ISE pots
deionized water over the pot and loosening the crystals with a spatula or other similar tool. Be careful not to scratch the plastic with a sharp object. Remove the loose debris and wipe the area clean with a cloth dampened in distilled water.
Close the ISE Probe and ISE Maintenance screens.
Note: closing the ISE Maintenance menu resets the ISE module.
10.18
10.3.17
Clean ISE Sample Fluidics
At least once every three months, or as needed, it is recommended to clean the ISE sample line with 2% alkaline detergent. Refer to the following procedure.
1. Open the ISE Maintenance menu.
2. Replace the Na, K and Cl electrodes with the clear dummy block provided in the ILab toolbox.
3. Disconnect the teflon tubing attached to the ISE probe.
4. Fill a 20 cc syringe with 2% alkaline detergent.
5. Using a spare piece of tubing, attach the syringe to the fitting of the ISE probe where the teflon tubing was attached.
6. Slowly move the syringe plunger in and out 20 times to clean the sample lines.
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
7. Discard the 2% detergent. Fill the syringe with distilled water and rinse the sample lines.
8. Discard the distilled water. Fill the syringe with ISE Diluent and slowly push the diluent into the lines.
9. Disconnect the syringe and re-attach the teflon tubing to the
ISE probe.
10.Remove the clear dummy block and re-install the ISE electrodes, making sure that no liquid layer remains in the electrode area.
11.
Close the ISE Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the ISE Maintenance menu resets the ISE module.
12.Perform an ISE internal calibration to make sure there is no leakage or errors.
10.3.18
Clean the Waste Tank Level Sensor
The level sensor in the waste tank must be cleaned weekly in order to avoid the accumulation of material on its surface. Since this procedure involves handling parts that are a potential biological hazard, gloves and goggles should be worn for protection.
1. Lift the waste tank cap with the level sensor and place in it a large pan.
2. Soak a cloth with 10% hypochlorite solution and gently wipe the sensor.
3. Rinse with abundant water .
4. Replace the cap with the level sensor back into the waste tank.
10.3.19
Clean the Barcode Reader Window
At least once a month, clean the barcode reader window with a dry cloth.
10.3.20
Replace syringe seals and clean plungers
Follow the instructions below in order to replace the syringe seals and clean the syringe plungers.
1. From the H/W Maintenance menu, select the Syringe button to open the Syringe screen.
2. Locate the Replace Seal area and choose the syringe to be replaced Sample Syringe / R1 Syringe / R2 Syringe, then click on Move to Replace. The syringe plunger can now be manually moved up and down.
Instrumentation Laboratory
10.19
Maintenance
Figure 10.13 - Syringe
3. Loosen the two plunger fixing nuts. Hold the upper fixing nut with pliers and loosen the lower nut with a wrench. After that, hold the plunger fixed portion with the pliers and loosen the upper fixing nut with the wrench.
4. Hold down the syringe drum by hand and turn the syringe drum fixing nut counterclockwise up to the top of the thread.
5. Slightly lower the syringe drum and pull it out toward you.
6. Remove the plunger. Water will spill, wipe it with a cloth. Be careful not to bend the plunger shaft (sliding portion) or damage its surface. If there are stains wipe them off with soft gauze.
7. Remove slotted set screw.
8. Remove seal and replace with a new one. Before installing the new packing, check the syringe drum and the new packing for dirt.
10.20
9. Reinstall the plunger.
10.After installation check the plunger for parallelism to the syringe drum. Oblique installation will result in leaks at the seal. Move the plunger up and down about 20 times by hand to wet the seal. A little water on the plunger will speed up the wetting.
11.Click on Replacement Complete to update the replacement record.
12.From the Remove Air area enter 5 times . Click on Remove
Air After the reset operation, bubbles are removed from the syringe. Visually check that the bubbles are removed. If bubbles are still present repeat this step until they are completely gone.
Note: the reset operation and bubble removal operation take
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
place simultaneously among the Sample, R1 and R2 dispensers, causing all 3 syringes to move up and down together, regardless of which seal has been replaced.
13.
Close the H/W Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
10.3.21
Replace High Calibrator Pot seal
The seal for the ISE High Calibrator Pot wears out due to the reciprocating motion of the probe during calibration, and must be replaced at regular intervals.
Refer to the diagram on Figure 10.14 to replace the pot seal as you follow the steps below:
Figure 10.14 - Hi Calibrator pot
Instrumentation Laboratory
1. From the ISE Maintenance menu, open the ISE Probe screen.
2. Click on Replace.
3. Turn the arm by hand and remove the hold-down screw of the ISE High Calibrator pot.
4. Remove the seal with tweezers.
5. Install a new seal by pushing it in with your finger. Check the seal to ensure that it is seated correctly and re-install the hold-down screw.
6. Click on Replacement Complete.
7. Close the ISE Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the ISE Maintenance menu resets the ISE module.
10.21
Maintenance
8. After replacement, perform an ISE internal calibration to ensure absence of errors.
10.3.22
Replace the ISE Syringe Seals
Caution: the replacement of a syringe seal must be performed using the ISE Maintenance screen. If this is attempted at other times such as during the ISE calibration, the system may move abruptly and errors/damage may occur.
Follow the steps below and refer to Figure 10.15 when performing the procedure to replace the ISE syringe seals:
Figure 10.15 - Syringe sealer replacement
10.22
1. From the ISE Maintenance menu, choose Syringe to open the ISE Syringe screen.
2. Remove the syringe cover by loosening the screws on both sides.
3. Click on Replace and move the syringe plunger to the central position.
4. Pinch the drain tube from the electrode with a tube clamp to prevent the liquid from flowing out.
5. Hold down the syringe drum by hand and turn the syringe drum fixing nut counterclockwise up to the top of the thread.
6. Slightly lower the syringe drum and pull it out toward you.
7. Remove the plunger. ISE solution may spill, wipe it with a cloth. Be careful not to bend the plunger shaft (sliding portion) or damage its surface. If there are stains wipe them off with soft gauze.
8. Remove slotted set screw.
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
9. Remove seal and replace with a new one. Before installing the new packing, check the syringe drum and the new packing for dirt.
10.Reinstall the plunger.
11.After installation of the syringe, connect the tubing and be sure to remove the tube clamp pinching the electrode drain tube.
Note: during assembly, check that the plunger is set straight. If it is tilted, the result will be liquid leakage and a shortened life for the seal. If more than one syringe seal is being replaced, do them one at a time. Removing more than one syringe at the same time, will result in back flow of liquids and leaks.
12.Install the syringe cover and securely tighten the screw.
13.Click on Replacement Complete to update the replacement date of the seal and return the pump to the initial position.
14.Close the ISE Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the ISE Maintenance menu resets the ISE module.
15.Prime the reagent for the replaced seal by performing an ISE
Prime2 through the Startup or Shutdown screens, making sure there are no leaks or clogging.
10.3.23
Replace ISE Probe Seal
To replace the ISE probe seal refer to Figure 10.16:
Figure 10.16 - Probe seal
Instrumentation Laboratory
1.
Open the ISE Maintenance menu.
2.
Click on Probe to open the ISE Probe screen
3.
Click on Replace to raise the probe.
4.
Cut and remove the old seal with a cutter.
5.
Install a new seal and push it up completely.
6.
Click on Replacement Canceled.
7.
Close the ISE Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the ISE Maintenance menu resets the ISE module.
10.23
Maintenance
8. Perform an ISE internal calibration to make sure there is no leakage.
10.3.24
Replace ISE tubings
Replace the two following tubings (refer to ISE fluidic diagram reported in sec 7 of this manual):
1. Tubing from dilution pot to mixer 1
2. Tubing from mixer 1 to mixer 2
10.3.25
Check Quality of Deionized Water
Only distilled, ion-exchanged or reverse-osmosis source water should be used as the external water supply for the ILab. Check the quality of the deionized water. The water supply pressure must be 0.5 to 3.5kg/cm
2
.
10.3.26
Check the Water Level in Cuvettes
This is a visual check to verify that the level of rinsing water is about 2 mm from the top of the cuvette during the washing process.
10.3.27
Check Water Pressure
Open the right front door of the unit. Locate the water pressure gauge (Figure 10.17). Check that the gauge reads the specified
90 kPa as follows (adjust pressure level if required):
1. Open the H/W Maintenance menu. Opening the H/W
Maintenance screen automatically starts the water pump to increase the water pressure.
2. Check that the pressure gauge reads 90 kPa mode. If the gauge shows a different value, contact your IL Service
Representative.
3. Close the H/W Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
10.3.28
Check Sample Probe for Damage
If a close-up inspection of the sample probe shows dents or barbs on the probe tip, the tip must be replaced to prevent deterioration of the test
10.24
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
10.3.29
Check Probe and Stirrer Alignment
At the completion of the above steps, check the alignment of sample, R1, R2 and ISE sample probes and stirrers 1 and 2
10.3.30
Set the bottom limit of the Sample probe
The bottom position of the sample probe is set according to information related to the sample container type, with the criteria shown below.
* To preserve sampling accuracy, the amount of sample adhering to the probe must be kept at a consistent minimum.
This is done by keeping the probe immersion depth constant for the type of container being used and the amount sampled, even if the liquid level drops in the container due to successive samplings. In case of sample cups, the system compensates as well for changes in the geometry of the container as the liquid level gets closer to the bottom
* To prevent the sample probe to hit the bottom of the sample containers causing the shock sensor to work and to stop the sampling, it is not allowed to descend beyond the set bottom limit.
* The sample probe recognizes an insufficient sample based on the preset bottom limit position. An improperly set bottom limit will cause the shock sensor to trigger and report a malfunction, instead of an “insufficient sample” message.
Figure 10.17 - HW Maintenance screen
Instrumentation Laboratory
10.25
Maintenance
* The bottom limit must be set as shown below, when the equipment is first installed , when the type of sample container is changed or the probe is replaced.
In order to set the Sample Probe Bottom Limit, Refer to Figures
16.17.
1. Open the H/W Maintenance menu and select Sample Probe
Down Limit.
2. Place a sample container of the appropriate type in any position from 61 to 75 of the sample tray. The inner row is chosen for being the one with the most stability.
Note: the Micro Cup and the Micro Cup on Tube options are not used. Do not set the down limit for this type of containers.
3. Click on the check button on the menu for the container chosen and enter the reagent tray position number in use.
Note: for the accurate measurement of the Difference from ISE
Probe (which compensates for small differences between the length of the sample probe and the ISE probe), utilize a standard sample cup.
4. Click on Start. The sample tray rotates to the specified position and the probe descends until the shock sensor detects the bottom of the container. A value in mm will be displayed in the Down Limit field of the screen. Repeat two or three times to check for consistency of this value.
5. When finished, close the H/W Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
6. After reset, shut the unit OFF and then restart. This updates the information on the sample probe down limit.
10.3.31
Setting the Bottom Limit of the Reagent Probe
The bottom position of the reagent probe is set according to information related to the reagent container type, with the criteria shown below.
* To preserve pipetting accuracy, the amount of reagent adhering to the probe must be kept at a consistent minimum.
This is done by keeping the probe immersion depth constant for the type of container being used and the amount aspirated, even if the liquid level drops in the container due to successive aspirations.
* To prevent the reagent probe hitting the bottom of the reagent bottles causing shock sensor errors, it is not allowed to descend beyond the bottom limit.
* The reagent probe recognizes an insufficient reagent based on the preset bottom limit position. An improperly set bottom
10.26
Instrumentation Laboratory
Figure 10.18
ILab600 Service Manual
limit will cause the shock sensor to actuate and report a malfunction, instead of an “insufficient reagent” message.
* The bottom limit must be set as shown below, when the equipment is first installed.
In order to set the R1/R2 Probe Bottom Limit, Refer to Figure
10.18 below.
1. Open the H/W Maintenance menu and select Reagent Probe
Down Limit.
Instrumentation Laboratory
2. Place a 100 mL and a 20 mL empty BoatILs in any position from 1 to 32 of the reagent tray. The inner row is chosen for being the one with the most stability. Make sure that the bottles are vertical. The shape of the bottom of bottles differs depending on the manufacturer. If bottles from different suppliers are used simultaneously, choose high-bottom bottles to do the setting (if a low-bottom bottle is used for the measurement, air may be aspirated from a high-bottom bottle before a probe shock sensor occurs).
3. Click on the check button on the menu for the container chosen and enter the reagent tray position number in use.
4. Click on Start. The reagent tray rotates to the specified position and the probe descends until the shock sensor detects the bottom of the bottle. A value in mm will be displayed in the Down Limit field of the screen. Repeat two or three times to check for consistency of this value.
5. When finished, close the H/W Maintenance menu.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
6. Shut the unit OFF and then restart. This updates the information on the reagent probe bottom limit.
10.27
Maintenance
10.3.32
Check the photometer lamp, replace if required
During the analytical verifications, use the water blank in order to evaluate the performance of the lamp. If If poor performances are suspected, replace the photometer lamp
10.3.33
Check electrodes, replace if necessary
Chech carefully the ISE overall performances. Evaluate the
Internal Calibration history, the QC performance and the precision test that should be run as part of the analytical verifications. If poor performance of any electrode is found, replace the electrode.
13.10.34
Check and Replace the Cuvette Drying Tip
One of the probes in the cuvette washing unit has a Teflon tip which serves as a wiper of the inside of the cuvette after the cuvette has been washed. As the drying tip wears out, the amount of liquid remaining in the cuvette will increase, resulting in deterioration of the test results. Tip should be replaced one time per year. To replace this tip refer to Figure 10.19 and proceed as follows:
Figure 10.19 - Drying tip replacement
10.28
1. From the HW/Maintenance menu, open the Cuvette Wash
Station screen.
2. Click on the Tension Off button which allows the cuvette wash station to be moved by hand.
3. Remove the cuvette wash station by loosening the fixing screw by hand.
4. Hold the rinsing probe with one hand, pull off the drying tip slowly.
5. Install a new drying tip. Push the new tip in until the notch hits the stopper on tip of the probe. Be sure not to bend or damage the drying tip.
Instrumentation Laboratory
ILab600 Service Manual
6. After re-installing the wash station make sure that the drying tip enters properly into the cuvettes by moving manually moving down the wash station.
7. Close the H/W Maintenance screen.
Note: closing the H/W Maintenance menu resets the entire analyzing module.
10.3.35
Check tubing of cuvette washing station, replace if required
Visually check the condition of the tubings connected to the probes of the Washing Station. If they show sign of internal contamination or build-up, replace the tubings.
10.4 Analytical verifications
At the completion of the above procedure, analytical verification should be performed. The following tests are recommended:
1. Run water blank. check results and reset Base Water Blank
2. Run ISE internal calibration
3. Run a precision test selecting indicatively 3-4 chemistries +
ISE
4. Run some QC sample and verify the accuracy of the system
5. Verify the accuracy of the QC data stored in the ILab system
For the acceptance specifications, refer to the section 2,
Installation, in paragraph Analytical Verifications, or to the chemistry insert sheets.
Instrumentation Laboratory
10.29

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Random access to samples
- Random access to reagents
- Primary tube sampling
- Stat sample analysis capability
- Barcoded reagents
- Programmable automatic startup
- Automatic shutdown and maintenance
- Operator interface using a Pentium PC
- Integral data management
- RS232-C bidirectional interface